Method for receiving an image signal and method for transmitting an image signal

ABSTRACT

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a method for receiving a signal, comprising the estimation step for estimating time and frequency shifts that are embedded in the received signal, to cancel-out shifts, wherein the method refers to the non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This Nonprovisional application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/369,053, filed Mar. 29, 2019, which is a continuation of PCT International Application No. PCT/JP2018/024592 filed in Japan on Jun. 28, 2018, which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 on PCT International Application No. PCT/JP2018/001735 filed in Japan on Jan. 22, 2018, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present patent proposes for designing receive methods, receive apparatus, transmitting method, transmitting apparatus, and transmitter-receiver systems.

BACKGROUND FIELD

There are many kinds of techniques about communication systems; These techniques have also led to technical changes in communication; The inventor has been proposed a transmitter-receiver system using time-division and frequency-division schemes (e.g., Patent list [1]-[6] and Non-Patent list [1]-[32]):

CITATION LIST Patent Literature REFERENCES

-   [1] JT2016-189500 -   [2] WO2012/153732A1 -   [3] WO2014/034664A1 -   [4] WO2013/183722A1 -   [5] JP2016-189501A -   [6] JP2016-189502A -   [7] JP2013-251902A -   [8] JP2012-170083A

Non-Patent Literature

References

-   [1] D. Gabor, “Theory of Communication”, in Proc. Inst. Elect.     Engr., pt. III, 93, 429-41, 1946 -   [2] D. Gabor, “Lectures on communication theory”, in Technical     Report., No., 238. Research Laboratory of Electronics, Massachusetts     Institute of technology Cambridge, 1-48, 1952. -   [3] L. W. Couch, II, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 8th     Ed.,” Pearson, 2013. -   [4] G. BiFolland, Harmonic Analysis in Phase Space, Annals of     Mathematics Studies Princeton Univ. Press, 1989. -   [5] Howe, R. On the role of the Heisenberg groups in harmonic     analysis,” Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society,     3-2,821-840 (1980) -   [6] Rosenberg, J. A selective history of the Stone-von Neumann     theorem, Contemporary Mathematics, 365. American Mathematical     Society (2004) -   [7] I. Daubechies, Time-frequency localization operators: a     geometric phase space approach,” IEEE Trans. Information Theory,     34-4,605-612, 1988. -   [8] I. Daubechies, The wavelet transform, time-frequency     localization and signal analysis,” IEEE Trans. Information Theory,     36-5,961-1005, 1990. -   [9] B. Le. Floch, M. Alard & C. Berrou, “coded OFDM: Coded     Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex,” Proc. of IEEE,     83-6,982-996, 1995. -   [10] P. Siohan, C. Sciclet, & N. Lacaille, “OFDM/OQAM: Analysis and     Design of OFDM/OQAM Systems, based on Filterbank Theory,” IEEE,     Trans. Sig. 50-5,1170-1183, May, 2002. -   [11] Sciclet, C., Siohan, P. & Pinchon, D. Perfect reconstruction     conditions and design of oversampled DFT-based transmultiplexers,     EURASIP J. on Applied Signal Processing, 2006, Article ID     15756,1-14, 2006. -   [12] B. F. Boroujeny, “OFDM Versus Filter Bank Multicarrier,” IEEE     Signal Processing Magazine, 28-3, 92-112, 2011. -   [13] P. P. Vaidyanathan, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks,”     Prentice-Hall, 1993. -   [14] J. Ville. “Theorie et application de la notion de signal     analytique,” Cables et transmission, no. 2, pp. 61-74.1948. (J.     Ville: “Theory and Applications of the notion of complex signal”,     translated from the French by I. Stein, T-92,8-1-58, U.S. Air Force     Project Rand, 1958) -   [15] P. M. Woodward, Probability and Information Theory, with     Applications to Radar, Pergamon Press, New York, 1953. -   [16] C. H. Wilcox, “The synthesis problem for radar ambiguity     function,” MRC Technical Report, No. 157, pp. 1-46. Mathematics     Research Center, U.S. Army, Univ. Wisconsin, Madison, 1960. -   [17] L. Auslander and R. Tolimieri, “Radar Ambiguity Functions and     Group Theory, SIAM J. Math. Anal., 16-3, 577-601, 1985. -   [18] C. W. Helstrom, Elements of Signal Detection and Estimation,”     PTR Prentice-Hall, 1995. -   [19] N. Levanson and E. Mozeson, “Radar Signals,” Wiley     Interscience, 2004 -   [20] Sakurai, J. J. Modem quantum mechanics, S. F. Tuan editor, Rev.     ed., Addison-Wesley Pub. Comp. 1994. -   [21] J. von Neumann, The Geometry of Operators, vol. II (Ann. Math.     Studies, no. 22), 1950. -   [22] Youla, D. C Generalized image restoration by the method of     alternating orthogonal projections, IEEE Trans. Circuits and     Systems, CAS-25-9, 694-702, 1978. -   [23] Stark, H., Cahana, D. & Webb, H. Restoration of arbitrary     finite energy optical objects from limited spatial and spectral     information, J. Opt. Soc. Amen, 71-6,635-642, 1981. -   [24] Kohda, T., Jitsumatsu, Y. & Aihara, K. Separability of     time-frequency synchronization, Proc. Int. Radar Symp., 964-969,     2013. -   [25] T. Kohda, Y Jitsumatsu, and K. Aihara, “Gabor division/spread     spectrum system is separable in time and frequency synchronization,”     Proc. VTC 2013 Fall, 1-5, 2013. -   [26] Y. Jitsumatsu, T. Kohda, and K. Aihara, “Spread Spectrum-based     Cooperative and individual time-frequency synchronization,” Proc.     (ISWCS), 1-5 2013. -   [27] Jitsumatsu, Y., Kohada, T. & Aihara, K. Delay-Doppler space     division-based multiple-access solves multiple-target detection,     Jonnsson, M., et al, (eds.) MACOM2013, LNCS8310, Springer, 39-53,     2013 -   [28] T. Kohada, Y. Jitsumatsu, and K. Aihara, “Recovering     noncoherent MPSK signal with unknown delay and Doppler using its     ambiguity function,” 4th International workshop on recent Advanced     in Broadband Access NetWork, (RABAN2013), 251-256, 2013. -   [29] T. Kohda, Y. Jitsumatsu and K. Aihara “Phase-tuned layers with     multiple 2D SS codes realize 16 PSK communication,” 2014 2014 IEEE     Wireless Commun. Networking Conference, WCNC 2014, 469-474 (2014). -   [30] Jitsumatsu, Y. & Kohda, T. Digital phase updating loop and     delay-Doppler space division multiplexing for higher order MPSK,     Jonnsson, M., et al, (eds.) MACOM2014, LNCS8715, Springer, 1-15,     2014. -   [31] T. Kohda, Y. Jitsumatsu, and K. Aihara, “Frequency-division     spread spectrum makes frequency synchronisation easy,” Proc. IEEE     Globecom 2012, 3952-3958, 2012. -   [32] T. Kohda, Y. Jitsumatsu, and K. Aihara, “Frequency     synchronisation using SS technique,” Proc. The ninth Int. Sympo. on     Wireless Communication Systems, 855-859, 2012. -   [33] J. F. Daughman, “Two-dimensional analysis of cortical receptive     field profiles,” Vision Research, 20, 846-856, 1980. -   [34] J. F. Daughman, “Image analysis by local 2-D spectral     signatures,” J. Opt. Soc. Amer. (A), 2, p. P74, 1985. -   [35] J. F. Daughman, “Complete Discrete 2-D Gabor Transform by     Neural Networks for Image Analysis and Compression,” IEEE Trans.     Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing, 36-7, 1169-1179, 1988. -   [36] Movella, Javier R. “Tutorial on Gabor filters”. Archived from     on 2009-04-19, Retrieved 2008-05-14. -   [37] Hans G. Feichtinger and Thomas Strohmen Gabor Analysis and     Algorithms, Birkhauser, 1998. -   [38] Jones, J. P. and Palmer, L. A. “An evaluation of the     two-dimensional gabor filter model of simple receptive fields in cat     striate cortex”. J. Neurophysiol. 58(6): 1233-1258. 1987 -   [39] Tai Sing Lee, “Image representation using 2d Gabor wavelets,”     IEEE Trans, on pattern analysis and machine intelligence, 18-10,     1-13, 1996. -   [40] W. D. Montgomery, “Optical applications of von Neumann's     alternating projection theorem,” Optics Letters, 7-1, 1-3, 1982. -   [41] W. D. Montgomery “Restoration of images processing a finite     Fourier series,” Optics Letters, 7-2,54-56, 1982. -   [42] A. V. Oppenheim and J. S. Lim, “Importance of phase in     Signals,” 1980, Proc of the IEEE, 96-5, 529-541, 1981

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Problems to be Solved by the Invention

The inventor remarked that the time-frequency shift operator (TFSO) representing the non-commutative property (NCP) of time-frequency shift (TFS)s in the time-frequency plane (TFP) plays an important role in signal detection and estimation and concluded that the NCP of the TFSO should be noticed.

To solve the above problem, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a proposed method mainly depends on this remark and its aim is to give efficient receive method, receiver, transmission method, transmitter, and transmitter-receiver system.

Solution to Problem

To solve the above problem, a method, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, for receiving a signal is a method for receiving a signal, comprising an estimation step for estimating a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in a received signal, wherein the estimation step refers to a non-commutative time-frequency shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

To solve the above problem, a receiver apparatus in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention is a receiver apparatus for receiving a signal, comprising an estimation part for estimating a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in a received signal, with reference to a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

To solve the above problem, a method, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, for transmitting a signal is a method for transmitting a signal, comprising a shift step for time-frequency shifting the signal to be transmitted, with reference to a noncommutative time-frequency shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

To solve the above problem, a transmitter apparatus in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention is a transmitter apparatus for transmitting a signal, comprising a time-frequency shift part for time-frequency shifting the signal to be transmitted, with reference to a non-commutative time-frequency shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

To solve the above problem, a method, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, for receiving an image signal is a method for receiving an image signal, comprising an estimation step for estimating a space shift and a spatial frequency shift that are embedded in the received image, with reference to a parameter space, wherein each of the space shift and the spatial frequency shift has dimension ≥2.

To solve the above problem, a method, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, for transmitting an image signal is a method for transmitting an image signal, comprising a shift step for space-spatial frequency shifting the image signal to be transmitted, with reference to a parameter space, wherein each of the space shift and the spatial frequency shift has dimension ≥2.

Advantageous Effects of Invention

The present disclosure enables one to realize an efficient receive method, a receiver, a transmission method, a transmitter, and a transmitter-receiver system.

FIGURE DESCRIPTION

FIG. 1 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows three kinds of divisions of the time-frequency plane (TFP): (a) indicates time division, (b) frequency division, and (c) Gabor division [1]. The solid lines in (a) show divisions of data of time duration T; the thin lines subdivisions by Time Domain (TD)-Phase code (PC); The dotted lines in (b) show divisions of data of bandwidth F; the dashed lines subdivisions by Frequency Domain (FD)-PC.

FIG. 2 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows an illustration of the non-commutative property (NCP) of time and frequency shift (TFS)s: The NCP is manifested in the expression of the product of the shift operators T_(τ,0)·T_(0,ν)=e^(−i2πτν), T_(0,ν)T_(τ,0): Its LHS corresponds to the triangle in the figure; the RHS to the square; the Phase Distortion (PD) e^(−i2πτν) appears; the circle in the figure shows the Symmetrical Time-Frequency Shift Operator (TFSO) [26]

$\begin{matrix} {\mathcal{T}_{\tau,\upsilon}\overset{def}{=}{e^{i\;{\pi\tau\upsilon}}{\mathcal{T}_{\tau,0} \cdot {\mathcal{T}_{o,\upsilon}.}}}} & \left\lbrack {{mathematical}\mspace{14mu}{{formula}({MF})}1} \right\rbrack \end{matrix}$

FIG. 3 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a) indicates the Gabor function located on the TFP and its related issues: a0) shows Gaussian chip waveform g_(mm)·(t) located on the TFP and its Fourier Transform (FT) G_(mm)·(f); a1) indicates the real and imaginary parts of the TD-template, the combination of g_(mm)·(t) weighted by the FD PC X′_(m′):a2) indicates the real and imaginary parts of the FD-template, the combination of G_(mm)·(f) weighted by the TD PC X_(m); b) shows NN′ Cross-Correlation Function (CCF)s, N′ column-sums of values of the TD-CCFs, and N row-sums of values of the FD-CCFs; c) shows the alternative projection, orthogonal projecting onto the Time-Limited Time Domain (TL-TD) and onto Band-Limited Frequency Domain (BL-FD), based on the Alternative Projection Theorem (APT), the estimated {circumflex over (t)} ^(d) ,{circumflex over (f)} _(D)   [MF2] and convergent values t^(d), f_(D).

FIG. 4 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the Synthesis Filter Bank (SFB) that contains TD-,FD-PCs X_(m),X′_(m)′ and the m′-th TD-template u _(m′t) ^(d) ,f _(D)[k],0≤m′≤N′−1,   [MF3] and generates the TD signature v[k] in (25), (67).

FIG. 5 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the SFB that contains TD-,FD-PCs X_(m),X′_(m′) and the m′-th FD-template U _(m) ^(FD)[l],0≤m≤N−1,   [MF4] and generates the FD signature in (25), (67) F[l].   [MF5]

FIG. 6 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the SFB with input, the complex-valued data with address p,p′ {d _(p,p′)}_(p,p′=1) ^(P,P′)   [MF6] generating the associated output, TD-Complex Envelope (CE) in (27), (71) ψ[k].   [MF7]

FIG. 7 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the SFB with input, the complex-valued data {d _(p,p′)}_(p,p′=1) ^(P,P′)   [MF8] generating the output, FD-CE in (27), (71) Ψ[l].   [MF9]

FIG. 8 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the Analysis Filter Bank (AFB) that is an array of N′ TD-cross-correlation (CCR)s for decoding the complex-valued data {d _(p,p′)}_(p=1) ^(P),1≤p′≤P′.   [MF10]

FIG. 9 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the AFB that is an array of N FD-CCRs for decoding the complex-valued data {d _(p,p′)}_(p′=1) ^(P′),1≤p≤P.   [MF11]

FIG. 10 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a) indicates an array of N′ TD-CCRs, c) an array of N FD-CCRs, and b) an illustration that the maximum likelihood estimate (MLE)s are obtained by these two types of arrays of CCRs and are alternatively updated one another by the von Neumann'a Alternative Projection Theorem (APT).

FIG. 11 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows an illustration of the von Neumann's APT, where Time-Limited Time Domain (TL-TD) and Band-Limited Frequency Domain (BL-FD) indicate two subspaces of the Hilbert space; The subspace TL-TD is an L Δt (or T_(s)) TL-TD; The subspace BL-FD is an L Δf (or F_(s)) BL-FD; the arrow in the figure means the orthogonal projecting onto the associated subspace; This results in getting the MLE and the cardinal numbers of the CCFs.

FIG. 12 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows a block-diagram of the system consisted of two alternative transmitters, controlled by switches, that perform efficient and joint estimation of delay and Doppler with high-precision, with (or without) being equipped with

   [MF12] -ary PSK communication and its transmitter (encoder) capable of jointly estimating delay and Doppler efficiently and precisely.

FIG. 13 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows a block-diagram of the system consisted of two alternative receivers, controlled by switches, that perform efficient and joint estimation of delay and Doppler with high-precision, with (or without) being equipped with

  [MF13] -ary PSK communication and its receiver-synchronizer (decoder) capable of jointly estimating delay and Doppler efficiently and precisely.

FIG. 14 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows an example of the distribution of values of the real part of the CCF as a function of the delay τ and Doppler ν of the Main Channel (MC).

FIG. 15 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows an example of the distribution of values of the real part of the CCF on the delay τ-Doppler ν space when the Artificial Channel (AC) is added to the main channel (MC).

FIG. 16 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the division of symbol's time-frequency plane (TFP) using a non-commutative AC-shift parameter space of co-dimension 2. The division of the TFPS of time duration T_(s) and bandwidth F_(S) (i.e., the Gabor division): (S⁽⁰⁾, S⁽¹⁾, S⁽²⁾, S⁽³⁾ shows a vertical axis perpendicularly attached to it, with a scale of non-commutative AC shifts (k _(d) ⁽⁰⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽⁰⁾),(k _(d) ⁽¹⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽¹⁾),(k _(d) ⁽²⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽²⁾),(k _(d) ⁽³⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽³⁾)   [MF14] and their associated 2-D PC codes according to the division X ^((i)).    [MF15]

FIG. 17 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows a division of the TFP using a non-commutative shift parameter space, where each of AC0-TFP, AC1-TFP, AC2-TFP, and AC3-TFP is shifted by its associated non-commutative shift.

FIG. 18 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the block-diagram of transmitter and receiver apparatuses.

FIG. 19 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the flow-chart of signal processing in the transmitter and receiver apparatuses.

FIG. 20 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the block-diagram of transmitter and receiver apparatuses.

FIG. 21 In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this Fig. shows the flow-chart of signal processing in the transmitter and receiver apparatuses.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

[Embodiment 1] In one embodiment of the invention, referring to Figures, the inventor explains the transmitter-receiver system. The inventor starts by expressing the theoretical issues behind the proposed method and an example of embodiment. Next, the inventor gives a correspondence between the proposed method and the content of the scope of claims described below.

This disclosure cites several references by referring to patent references and non-patent references and hence the citation is within this disclosure.

These references are listed to cite technical terms and to refer the problems to be solved and the background, relating to this disclosure. Thus the citation does not affect the patentability of the present disclosure.

«Summary of Theoretical View Points: Communication Exploiting the NCP of TFSOs—Designs of a Transmitter Capable of Jointly Estimating Delay and Doppler and Those of its Receiver-»

It is not easy to perform synchronization of TD- and FD-Division communication systems, that are designed to convey data symbol of duration T_(s) and bandwidth F_(s) efficiently. The radar problem of estimating delay t_(d) and Doppler f_(D) from a received echo signal remains unsolved. These difficulties come from phase distortion (PD)s e ^(j2piT) ^(s) ^(F) ^(s)    [MF16] and e ^(j2pit) ^(d) ^(f) ^(D)    [MF17] that are generated by TFSOs and are similar as well-known algebraic relations for the position and momentum operators in quantum mechanics [4]. The basic purpose of a radar is to detect the presence of an object of interest, called target detection, and provide information concerning the object's location, motion, and other parameters, referred to as parameter estimation. So, radars are based on the statistical testing of hypotheses for signal detection and estimation. The determination of delay and Doppler is an estimation problem from the PDs containing two unknowns. Neither delay nor Doppler is successfully detected and estimated with high precision from a noisy received signal without the help of the Weyl-Heisenberg group (WHG) theory. The description of the invention is summarized as the following 5 items.

(summary1) When one designs a transmit signal, one should treat a signal in the TD and its Fourier transform (FT), i.e., a signal in the FD symmetrically. In addition, the symmetrical time and frequency shift operator (TFSO) satisfying time-frequency symmetrical property (TFSP) is proven to be an operator such that the address of a multiplexed signal is manifested by the non-commutative property (NCP) of TFSs (cf. (39), (44), (51), (56)).

(summary2) Time-frequency shifted Gaussian pulses, i.e., Gabor functions by 2-D binary phase-shift-keying (BPSK) modulation by TD- and FD-PCs of periods N,N′ are shown to be useful for maximum likelihood estimate (MLE)s of parameters t_(d), f_(D) among N′,N hypotheses in FD- and TD-likelihood functional (LF)s, respectively.

TD- and FD-PCs are usually called “2-D spread spectrum (SS) codes (the adjective “SS” is something of a misnomer) to the contrary, the inventor calls it a 2-D PC for BPSK modulation; Note that BPSK modulation has two functions: merits and demerits. Many researchers have not been really aware of the important roles of BPSK modulation. The present disclosure gives the pros and cons of the BPSK modulation that have not been noticed as follows.

The TD- and FD-CEs (27), wideband signals, called “signatures”, contain PDs due to the BPSK modulation. The modulation makes a situation that N TD-template CE of type-3 (29) (or of type-1 (49)) with its support [0,T_(s)]×[0,LΔf] (or [0,LΔt]×[0,F_(s)]) and N′ FD-template CE of type-4 (33) (or of type-2 (54)) with support [0,LΔt]×[0, F_(s)] (or [0, T_(s)]×[0,LΔf]) are automatically embedded into these TD- and FD-CEs as indications of matching. Hence these PDs play an important role in hypotheses-testing by the use of CCRs (see (30), Proposition 4 and (35), Proposition 5).

(summary3) Phase information of a signal has not been effectively used in ordinary MLEs to the contrary, the inventor defines 4 kinds of TD- and FD-cross-correlation function (CCF)s between a received signal and templates: TD-template CE of type 3 (or of type 1) and FD-template CE of type 4 (or of type 2) as a kind of optimum receivers. These CCFs are proven to have rigorous expressions in the product form of the ambiguity function (AF) and several twiddle factors, defined by a discretized signal of time- and frequency-samplings Δt, Δf=(LΔt)⁻¹, when co-operatively using BPSK modulation with TD- and FD-PCs, and denoted as

[MF 18] $W = {e^{\frac{{- j}\; 2\;\pi}{L}}.}$ The PDs due to the NCP of TFSs can be evaluated in the powers of the twiddle factors, i.e., the summation of the PDs over the chip-address can be rigorously represented in the form of DFT and IDFT; Thus this expression has a product form of three functions (see (41) in Lemma 2, (45) in Lemma 4, and (52), 57)). In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, an efficient computation by DSP can be guaranteed.

(summary4) Using the Youla's signal reconstruction method [22], the inventor gives a proof of the APT-based Phase Updating Loop (PUL) algorithm, defined and introduced in the patent reference, patent [1].

First, define T_(s) (or LΔt)-time limited (TL) TD space, E₃ (or E₁) and F_(s) (or LΔf)-band limited (BL) FD space E₄ (or E₂), as subspaces of the Hilbert space.

Secondly, according to the arrays of N′ TD-CCFs and N FD-CCFs, define 4 projection operator (PO)s orthogonal projecting onto E₃ (or E₁) and onto E₄ (or E₂), denoted by P₃ (or P₁) and P₄ (or P₂), respectively.

Thirdly, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the inventor defines the alternative projection theorem operator (APTO) based on the alternative projection theorem (APT), defined as P ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)(or P ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)),   [MF19] where F^(−1,d),F^(d) denote the IDFT,DFT. Fourthly, the inventor gives an expression (59) for updating MLEs of a gain factor Ae^(1κ) of the channel as a function of estimates {circumflex over (t)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (f)} _(D)   [MF20] and two expressions (60), (61) for updating MLE of {circumflex over (t)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (f)} _(D).    [MF21] Using these three expressions for updating MLEs, the inventor concludes that (t_(d), f_(D)) arc estimated within the convergence region of the APT operator, i.e., the rectangle of chip-pulse duration LΔt and chip bandwidth LΔf with chip and data addresses ((ρ,ρ′),p^(→)) and proves that MLEs {circumflex over (t)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (f)} _(D)   [MF22] are estimated within LΔt×LΔf and its computional complexity order is O(N+N′),   [MF23] in place of O(N·N′),   [MF24]

That is, this APT operator singles out some rectangle in the time-frequency plane (TFP) and filters out other regions. Such an operator is referred to as a phase-space (or time-frequency) localization operator [7] and thus plays an important role of filters, in place of conventional sharp filters usually used in DSP.

A Gaussian function is not employed in most of communication systems primarily because it does not satisfy the Nyquist condition. However, several favourable properties of Gaussians in the TFP are shown to be of benefit to our (t_(d), f_(D))-estimation problem and hence Gaussians are shown to be of crucial importance.

The PUL algorithm is an iteration for searching (t_(d), f_(D)) with no restriction of the range of (t_(d), f_(D)) if the resource of time duration PT_(s) and bandwidth P′F_(s), for the data-level address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′)   [MF25] can be available. Accordingly, it is shown that the use of a combination of a transmitter of a 2-D PC modulated signal of TD-,FD-Gaussian functions and a receiver in which the PUL is implemented in TD-,FD-CCF arrays makes it possible to provide a communication system which is capable of high-precision and high-speed parameter estimation. In other words, the use of the above-described configuration presents a paradigm shift in communication systems utilizing NCP.

(summary5) the inventor gives an encoding-decoding system for a high

   [MF26] -PSK communication in cooperation with establishing synchronization.

   [MF27] -PSK communication is available to an automotive radar capable of both estimating delay-Doppler and communicating to another object with data. It is not easy to transmit an

   [MF28] -PSK signal

[MF 29] ${\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\;\pi\; k}{\mathcal{M}} \right)},\left( {0 \leq k \leq {\mathcal{M} - 1}} \right)$ primarily because the idendification of the phase

[MF 30] $\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\;\pi}{\mathcal{M}} \right)$ is difficult in the midst of phase errors and phase noise; but is an important modulation for the sake of efficient use of radio resources (the number log₂

-bit   [MF31] is transmitted at once). It is, however, known that the realization of this modulation/demodulation is difficult.

To solve this problem, as shown in the lower part (the intermediate block between the Switches 1-1 and 1-2) in FIG. 12, the transmitter

-   1) decomposes an integer (“information”) k given as

$\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 32} \right\rbrack\begin{matrix} {{k = {{j\;\mathcal{M}_{0}} + j^{\prime}}},{j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack\left( {= {{the}\mspace{20mu}{integer}\mspace{14mu}{part}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}\frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}}} \right)}} \\ {{j^{\prime} = {\left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}\left( {= {{the}\mspace{14mu}{fractional}\mspace{14mu}{part}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}\frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}}} \right)}};} \end{matrix}$

-   2) divides the delay-Doppler parameter space, called the target     space equally into

[MF 33] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ sub-parameter spaces and assigns 2-D PC (TD- and FD-PCs) to each sub-space, where (

≥

₀).   [MF34] Furthermore, the transmitter 1) 2-D BPSK modulates a chip pulse by the

[MF 35] $i\left( {,{0 \leq i \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}} \right)$ -th 2-D PC; 2) combines it to form a

[MF 36] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ -code-multiplexed signal;

-   3) time-frequency-shifts the resultant signal (called a signature)     about by around the center of the j-th sub-parameter space, i.e., by     the time delay     k _(d) ^((j))   [MF37]     and by the frequency delay     l _(D) ^((j))   [MF38]     where     shift(k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))))   [MF39]     is referred to as the shift of the j-th Artificial Channel (AC); -   4) M₀-PSK modulates the time-frequency shifted signature by the     j′-th     ₀   [MF40]     -ary symbol

[MF 41] ${\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\;\pi\; j^{\prime}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}\mspace{14mu}\left( {,{0 \leq j^{\prime} \leq {\mathcal{M}_{0} - 1}}} \right)$ and transmits the modulated signal. Consequently, the (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))))   [MF42] -shifted signature is again distorted by being passed through the Main Channel (MC) with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF43] The inventor designs a CCF between an estimated and received template and a received CE as follows. As shown in the middle block, connected to the Switch 2-1 in FIG. 13, The receiver

-   1′) decomposes an estimate of k     {circumflex over (k)}   [MF44]     as

[MF 45] ${\hat{k} = {{\hat{j}\mathcal{M}_{0}} + {\hat{j}}^{\prime}}},{\hat{j} = \left\lbrack \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{{\hat{j^{\prime}} = \left\{ \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}};}$

-   2′) 2-D BPSK modulates a chip pulse by the

[MF 46] $\hat{j}\left( {,{0 \leq \hat{j} \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}} \right)$ -th 2-D PC;

-   3′) time-frequency-shifts it by the     ĵ   [MF47]     -th AC's     shift(k _(d) ^(({right arrow over (j)})) ,l _(D)     ^(({right arrow over (j)}))))   [MF48] -   4′) and M₀-PSK demodulates the resultant signal by the     ĵ′   [MF49]     -th     ₀   [MF50]     -ary symbol

[MF 51] ${\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\;\pi\;\hat{j^{\prime}}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}\mspace{14mu}{\left( {,{0 \leq \hat{j^{\prime}} \leq {\mathcal{M}_{0} - 1}}} \right).}$ The resultant signal is an estimated and received template.

Maximization of the real parts of N′ TD-CCFs and N FD-CCFs using their associated LFs, in array forms, is performed in terms of the cardinal numbers of the CCFs, as a function of the chip-level address (ρ′,ρ) and the data-level address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′),   [MF52] and a pair of estimated decoding integers of k: (ĵ,ĵ′),   [MF53] The receiver 1) chooses the ĵ   [MF54] -th 2-D PC from

[MF 55] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ 2-D PCs; 2) cancels-out the phase of the data d_(p→) with address {right arrow over (p)}−(p,p′)   [MF56] by the PSK signal

[MF 57] ${\exp\left( \frac{{- i}\; 2\;\pi\;\hat{j^{\prime}}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)},$

-   3) maximizes the real parts of the 2 CCFs based the PUL algorithm,     as shown in the lower block, connected to the Switch 2-2, in FIG.     13, in terms of     (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF58]     and     ĵ,ĵ′,   [MF59]     and 4) obtains the MLE of k     k*=j*     ₀ +j* ^(,l)   [MF60]     This is realized by constructing a low     ₀   [MF61]     -ary PSK-modulation-based encoder-decoder system and combining the     system, together with exploiting

[MF 62] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ ACs with non-commutative time-frequency shifts. This provides a high

   [MF63] -ary PSK modulation communication system. Namely, this system is capable of being used also for a synchronizer (or radar) for estimating parameters, in cooperation with decoder of k, from the output signal of one AC chosen, according to k, from

[MF 64] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ ACs with non-commutative shifts, each of which is connected to the MC with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D)).   [MF65] Thus, the multiplexed system using non-commutative AC shifts may be a paradigm shift. Note that the computational complexity of

   [MF66] -ary PSK-demodulation is about

[MF 67] $\left( {\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} + \frac{\mathcal{M}_{0}}{\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}} \right)$ times larger than that of synchronizer (or radar), O(N+N′): «Detailed Description of Theoretical Issues of the Patent and Examples of Embodiment of Communication Systems»

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the inventor describes details of theoretical issues of communication systems and specific examples of an embodiment of the communication systems.

1. Background of the Invention

One of important problems to be solved in communication is to design a wireless communication system that can accommodate more traffic within a limited amount of radio spectrum [1]. Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex (OFDM) has been the dominant technology, as a TD- and FD-division multiplexed system to convey data of time T_(s) and bandwidth F_(s) (see FIG. 1); but, it has shortcomings that the orthogonality is destroyed due to time and frequency offsets.

FIG. 1 shows three kinds of divisions of the time-frequency plane (TFP): (a) indicates time division, (b) frequency division, and (c) Gabor division [1]. The solid lines in (a) show divisions of data of time duration T; the thin lines subdivisions by Time Domain (TD)-Phase code (PC); The dotted lines in (b) show divisions of data of bandwidth F; the dashed lines subdivisions by Frequency Domain (FD)-PC.

“Synchronisation” is the first procedure for communication through the channel with t_(d), f_(D). However, phase distortion (PD)s due to time and frequency shift operator (TFSO) needed to the TD- and FD-division multiplex e ^(j2πt) ^(e) ^(F) ^(o)    [MF68] are followed by the PD of the channel e ^(j2πt) ^(d) ^(F) ^(D)    [MF69] Thus it is not easy to establish synchronisation. Moreover, there is no effective solution to the problem of estimating t_(d), f_(D) from an echo signal of radars.

The inventor first modulates TD-signal and its FT, i.e., FD-signal satisfying the time and frequency symmetrical property (TFSP) in terms of t_(d), f_(D) (see FIG. 2), by TD- and FD-PCs to design TD- and FD-signatures.

FIG. 2 shows an illustration of the NCP of TFSs (see [0014]), shows an illustration of the non-commutative property (NCP) of time and frequency shift (TFS)s: The NCP is manifested in the expression of the product of the shift operators T_(τ,0)·T_(0,ν)=e^(−i2πτν)T_(0,ν)T_(τ,0): Its LHS corresponds to the triangle in the figure; the RHS to the square; the Phase Distortion (PD) e^(−i2πτν) appears; the circle in the figure shows the Symmetrical Time-Frequency Shift Operator (TFSO) [26]

$\begin{matrix} {\mathcal{T}_{\tau,\upsilon}\overset{def}{=}{e^{i\;{\pi\tau\upsilon}}{\mathcal{T}_{\tau,0} \cdot {\mathcal{T}_{o,\upsilon}.}}}} & \lbrack{MF70}\rbrack \end{matrix}$

Secondly, the inventor defines arrays of TD- and FD-CCFs (see FIG. 3b ), in the form of AFs [15] as optimum receivers for detecting templates based on the fact that PDs are embedded into signatures as templates,

As shown in [27]-[32], patent [1]-patent [6], the proposed estimation method firstly determines t_(d), f_(D) and the cardinal numbers of TD- and FD-CCFs maximizing the real parts of TD- and FD-CCFs; with no advance information about t_(d), f_(D) and secondly updates estimates of t_(d), f_(D) alternatively. Furthermore, it is shown that this method becomes a good solution to the radar problem. FIG. 3a indicates the Gabor function located on the TFP and its related issues: FIG. 3a 0 shows Gaussian chip waveform g_(mm′)(t) located on the TFP and its Fourier Transform (FT) G_(mm′)(f); FIG. 3a 1 indicates the real and imaginary parts of the TD-template, the combination of g_(mm′)(t) weighted by the FD PC X′_(m′): FIG. 3a 2 indicates the real and imaginary parts of the FD-template, the combination of G_(mm′)(f) weighted by the TD PC X_(m); FIG. 3b shows NN′ Cross-Correlation Function (CCF)s, N′ column-sums of values of the TD-CCFs, and N row-sums of values of the FD-CCFs; FIG. 3c shows the alternative projection, orthogonal projecting onto the Time-Limited Time Domain (TL-TD) and onto Band-Limited Frequency Domain (BL-FD), based on the Alternative Projection Theorem (APT), the estimated {circumflex over (t)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (f)} _(D),   [MF71] and convergent values t_(d), f_(D).

The problem of estimating t_(d), f_(D) from an echo signal is equivalent to that of determining two unknowns from PDs due to the NCP of TFSs. Hence, this belongs to the category of signal detection and estimation based on the Weyl-Heisenberg Group (WHG) theory. However, except Auslander & Tolimieri's remark [17], many radar researchers haven't obtained effective estimation methods with high precision yet because the NCP of TFSs was not taken into care in their estimation methods. On the contrary, the invention described in this disclosure is based on the inventor's belief that the NCP of TFSs only serves to strengthen the efficiency of communication systems including radars. The wavelet transform [8]. using the time and frequency shifted function, i.e., the Gabor elementary functions

$\begin{matrix} {{g_{m,m^{\prime}}(t)}\overset{def}{=}{{g\left( {t - {mT}_{c}} \right)}e^{i\; 2{\pi m}^{\prime}}{F_{c}^{\;^{\prime}}\left( {t - {mT}_{c}} \right)}}} & \lbrack{MF72}\rbrack \end{matrix}$ discusses series representations of the form

[MF 73] ${f(t)} = {\sum\limits_{m,m^{\prime}}{a_{m,m^{\prime}}e^{i\; 2\pi\; m^{\prime}v_{0}t}{g\left( {t - {m\;\tau_{0}}} \right)}}}$ and is primarily concerned with the coefficients a_(m,m′). In wireless communication, the 5G, after 5G candidates:OFDM/OQAM, the filter bank multi-carrier (FBMC), and GFDM [9, 10, 12] have an interest in designing a multiplexed signal f(t) with information a_(m,m′) to be transmitted and the elementary pulse g(t). Namely, the primary concern is the shape of g(t) that makes intersymbol interference (ISI) and interchannel interference (ICI) to zero and the orthogonality of g_(m,m′) (t).

In wireless communication, synchronisation that's resistant to time and frequency offsets is necessary. However, there are a few attempts to estimate t_(d), f_(D). Furthermore, most of communication engineers considers that the PD due to TFSs mτ₀, m′V₀ e ^(i·r) ¹ ^(mn) ⁰ ^(m·′t/0)   [MF74] can be negligible. However, the group theoretic property of the WHG tells us that the PD of the channel e ^(iπt) ^(d) ^(f) ^(D)    [MF75] is followed by the PD due to TFSs e ^(iπmn) ⁰ ^(m′D) ⁰    [MF76] and the PD due to the multi-carrier technique e ^(iπm′ν) ⁰ ^(t) ^(d)    [MF77] arises simultaneously. The mechanism of phase errors arising is not simple.

One must start by solving the following three themes behind the radar problem. Note that Linear FM Continuous Wave with a chirp signal, a compressed pulse modulated by pulse of short time, and its multi-carrier version are used as a transmit signal in conventional radars [19].

(theme 1) The radar problem in range and velocity is essentially a problem of two unknowns t_(d), f_(D); most of receivers is based on searching peaks of the magnitude of complex-valued ambiguity function (AF) of two variables, called the ambiguity surface or using the AF-characteristic of a chirp signal, It's a natural belief that when solving the problem relating to a given function of two unknowns, a way of dealing jointly with (independent) some other functions of the unknowns may be a better solving method.

(theme 2) The radar problem is suffering from the PD e ^(j2πt) ^(d) ^(f) ^(D)    [MF78] due to the NCP of the TFSs. Such a similar situation due to the NCP of position and momentum operators in quantum mechanics is observed. A chirp pulse sequence of time interval T_(p) and frequency shift F_(p) generates a PD e ^(j2πT) ^(p) ^(F) ^(p)    [MF79]

Furthermore, a communication system multiplexed by non-overlapped superposition of a signal on the TFP to covey data-symbols of time duration T_(s) and bandwidth F_(s), through the channel with t_(d), f_(D) is causing PD e ^(j2πt) ^(d) ^(f) ^(D)    [MF80] followed by PD e ^(j2πT) ^(x) ^(F) ^(s)    [MF81]

(theme 3) Closely relating to the theme 2, it is not easy to understand a mechanism whereby PD arises. That is, in communication systems and radars, two shift operators are usually defined as S(a)f(t)=f(t+a),M(a)f(t)=e ^(i2πal) f(t),l∈

   [MF82] and give the NCP, represented as M(v)S(u)=e^(−i2πuv)S(u)M(v) i.e., the NCP is manifested as the PD e^(−i2πuv), in other words, the phase term of the product of two shifts comes from the fact that u, v are exponentiated. This observation is the same as the mathematical basis for the introduction of the Heisenberg group in quantum mechanics, proposed by Weyl. Hence such PD is an important clue to solve the radar or synchronisation problem and is purely symbolic one. Careful consideration should be given to the exponential function, i.e., e^(−i2πuv). This leads to the symmetrical TFSO (see FIG. 2 and (4), (24)) that is main concern in the present invention.

2. Symmetrical Time-Frequency Shift Operators

Let s(t) denote a real-valued pulse, and let σ (t) denote the Hilbert transform of s(t). Then one gets a complex signal, referred to as an analytic signal, defined as ψ(t)=s(t)+iσ(t)[1]. A typical echo signal can be represented in the form [MF83] r _(e)(t;t _(d) ,f _(D))=A

ψ(t−t _(d))e ^(iΩ(t−t) ^(d) ^()+iφ,)  (1) where ψ(t) is the Complex Envelope (CE) of a pulse, A,t _(d),Ω,φ,∩−Ω_(r)=2πf _(D)   [MF84] denote its amplitude, time of arrival, carrier frequency, the phase of its carrier, and a change in its carrier frequency, called the Doppler shift of the reference carrier Ω_(r)=2πf_(r). For brevity, let us assume Ω_(r)=0 for a moment. Let F[⋅]   [MF85] denote the Fourier Transform (FT) and Ψ(f)=F[ψ(t)]   [MF86] denote the FT of ψ(t), then the FT of r_(e)(t; t_(d), f_(D)) is in the form [MF87] R _(e)(f;t _(d) ,f _(D))=A

F[ψ(t−t _(d))e ^(i2πf) ^(D) ^((t−t) ^(d) ⁾]e ^(iφ) =A

Ψ(f−f _(D))e ^(−i2πft) ^(d) ^(+iφ)   (2) A pair of r_(e)(t; t_(d), f_(D)) and R_(e)(f; t_(d), f_(D)) is not symmetrical in t_(d) and f_(D) because the product of unknowns t_(d) and f_(D) appears only in the TD function (1).

But it can be represented in a slightly modified form [24, 26]

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 88} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{\mathcal{F}\left\lbrack {{\psi\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\pi\;{f_{D}{({t - \frac{t_{d}}{2}})}}}} \right\rbrack} = {{\Psi\left( {f - f_{D}} \right)}{e^{{- i}\; 2\pi\;{t_{d}{({f - \frac{f_{D}}{2}})}}}.}}} & (3) \end{matrix}$ If a TD function x(t) and its FD function X(f)=F[x(t)]   [MF89] are symmetrical in terms of t_(d) and f_(D), then this property is called the time and frequency symmetrical property (TFSP) (see FIG. 2). Thus one can define a symmetrical time-frequency shift operators (TFSO) satisfying the TFSP, given as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 90} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{t_{d},f_{D}}{x(t)}} = {{x\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\pi\;{f_{D}{({t - \frac{t_{d}}{2}})}}}}},} \\ {{\mathcal{T}_{f_{D},{- t_{d}}}^{f}{X(f)}} = {{X\left( {f - f_{D}} \right)}e^{{- i}\; 2\pi\;{t_{d}{({f - \frac{f_{D}}{2}})}}}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (4) \end{matrix}$ and get a trivial identity between the two operators (Property 1 of the symmetrical TFSOs): [MF91] T _(f) _(D) _(,−t) _(d) ^(f)=FT_(t) _(d) _(,f) _(D) F ⁻¹  (5) Usually, the time shift operator S(−t_(d))x(t)=x(t−t_(d)) and the modulation operator M(f _(D))x(t)=e ^(i2πf) ^(D) ^(t) x(t)   [MF92] are used. On the contrary, the shifts

[MF 93] $\frac{t_{d}}{2}$ in a TD signal x(t) and

[MF 94] $\frac{f_{D}}{2}$ in its FD signal X(f) in (4), hereafter called “half shifts”, seem to be a few slight modifications to usual time-frequency representations of signal: S(−t _(d))M(f _(D))x(t)=x(t−t _(d))e ^(i2πf) ^(D) ^((t−t) ^(d) ⁾   [MF95] or M(f _(D))S(−t _(d))x(t)=x(t−t _(d))e ^(i2πf) ^(D) ^(t).   [MF96] But such half shifts are our intention to get effective representations of a radar signal and its received one so that their phase factors are fully traced in both the TD and FD as shown below.

Proposition 1: The TFSO (4) is identical to von Neumann's canonical commutative relations (usually abbreviated to CCRs) in quantum mechanics [4, 6] as referred to as the Stone-von Neumann theorem [5, 4, 25], defined as a two-parameter family of unitary operators S(a, b)=e^(−1/2iab)U(a)V(b) with its group-theoretic property, where U(a), V(b) are defined below. T_(τ,ν) and T_(ν,−τ) ^(f) are referred to as von Neumann's TFSO s hereafter.

The Heisenberg commutation relation, referred to as the Heisenberg's uncertainty principle, is given as [4, 5] [MF97] [Q,P]=QP−PQ=ih.  (6) Proposition 2: Let us assume that Q and P can be exponentiated to one-parameter unitary groups U(a)=exp(iaQ), V(b)=exp(ibP), respectively (a, b real) and let us associate Q,P with TFSOs T_(τ,0), T_(0,ν), respectively, then

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 98} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {\left\lbrack {\mathcal{T}_{\tau,0},\mathcal{T}_{0,v}} \right\rbrack = {{- 2}i\;{\sin\left( {\pi{\begin{matrix} \tau & 0 \\ 0 & v \end{matrix}}} \right)}{\mathcal{T}_{\tau,v}.}}} & (7) \end{matrix}$ Thus, the classical limit, i.e., h→0   [MF99] limit [20] corresponds to [MF100] [T _(r,0) ,T _(0,v)]=0, PD-free, i.e., τνϵ

  (8) where h,[‘,’]   [MF101] denote the reduced Planck's constant

[MF 102] $\frac{h}{2\pi}$ and the quantum mechanics commutator.

The composition of TFSOs

     [MF 103] 𝒯 t 1 , f 1 ⁢ ⁢ 𝒯 t 2 , f 2 = e ⁢ i ⁢ ⁢ π ⁡ ( t 1 ⁢ f 1 + t 2 ⁢ f 2 ) ⁢ 𝒯 t 1 , 0 ⁢ 𝒯 0 , f 1 ⁢ 𝒯 t 2 , 0 ⁢ 𝒯 0 , f 2 = e i ⁢ ⁢ π ⁡ ( t 1 ⁢ f 1 + t 2 ⁢ f 2 + 2 ⁢ t 2 ⁢ f 1 ) ⁢ 𝒯 t 1 , 0 ⁢ T t 2 , 0 ⁢ 𝒯 0 , f 1 ⁢ 𝒯 0 , f 2 = e i ⁢ ⁢ π ⁡ ( t 1 ⁢ f 1 + t 2 ⁢ f 2 + 2 ⁢ t 2 ⁢ f 1 - ( t 1 + t 2 ) ⁢ ( f 1 + f 2 ) ) ⁢ 𝒯 t 1 + t 2 , f 1 + f 2 gives (Property 2 of the symmetrical TFSOs):

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 104} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{t_{1},f_{1}}\mathcal{T}_{t_{2},f_{2}}} = {e^{{- i}\;\pi}{\begin{matrix} t_{1} & f_{1} \\ t_{2} & f_{2} \end{matrix}}\mathcal{T}_{{t_{1} + t_{2}},{f_{1} + f_{2}}}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{f_{1},{- t_{1}}}^{f}\mathcal{T}_{f_{2},{- t_{2}}}^{f}} = {e^{{- i}\;\pi}{\begin{matrix} t_{1} & f_{1} \\ t_{2} & f_{2} \end{matrix}}\mathcal{T}_{{f_{1} + f_{2}},{{- t_{1}} - t_{2}}}^{f}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (9) \end{matrix}$ Eq. (7) is an example of the first equation in eq.9).

The fact that the product of unknowns t_(d) and f_(D) appear symmetrically in the exponent of PDs of TD- and FD-functions from their symmetry property is the more important property of the symmetrical TFSOs. Chip- and data-level addresses of the multiplexed signal appeared in the the exponent of PDs as well. The product of such exponents enables us to easily estimate parameters as discussed below. For example, in wireless communication [9, 10] an orthogonal frequency division multiplex (OFDM) signal

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 105} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{{f(t)} = {\sum\limits_{m,n}{a_{m,n}e^{i\; 2\pi\; m\; v_{0}t}{x\left( {t - {n\;\tau_{0}}} \right)}}}},{{{with}\mspace{14mu} v_{o}\tau_{0}} = 1}} & (10) \end{matrix}$ is the main subject, where the coefficients a_(m,n) take complex values representing an encoded transmit data, and x(t) is a prototype function. The OFDM signal is rewritten as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 106} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{f(t)} = {\sum\limits_{m,n}{a_{m,n}e^{i\; 2\pi\; n\;\tau_{0}m\; v_{0}}\mathcal{T}_{{n\;\tau_{0}},{m\; v_{0}}}{{x(t)}.}}}} & (11) \end{matrix}$

Hence the PD e^(iπnτ0mν0) does not alter the a_(m,n) except its sign as far as the condition τ₀ν₀=1 holds (cf. (8)). But if there are offsets such as τ′=τ₀+ϵ_(τ) and ν′=ν₀+ε_(ν), then the PD

[MF 107] ${e^{{- i}\;\pi}{\begin{matrix} {\tau_{0} + ɛ_{\tau}} & 0 \\ 0 & {v_{0} + ɛ_{v}} \end{matrix}}} = {\left( {- 1} \right)^{\tau_{0}v_{0}}e^{{- i}\;\pi\;{({{ɛ_{\tau} \cdot v_{0}} + {ɛ_{v} \cdot \tau_{0}} + {ɛ_{\tau}ɛ_{v}}})}}}$ inevitably arises followed by the PD e ^(−iπt) ^(d) ^(f) ^(D)    [MF108] through a doubly dispersive channel with t_(d) and f_(D). That is, we have to confront a phase-distorted signal

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 109} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{\mathcal{T}_{t_{d},f_{D}}{f(t)}} = {\sum\limits_{m,n}{a_{m,n}e^{{- i}\;\pi\;{({{t_{d}f_{D}} + {2\; t_{d}m\; v_{0}}})}}{x\left( {t - {n\;\tau_{0}} - t_{d}} \right)}{e^{i\; 2\;{\pi{({{m\; v_{0}} + f_{D}})}}t}.}}}} & (12) \end{matrix}$ The conventional non-overlapping superposition of a signal in the TFP [1, 2, 9, 10, 12], defined as in (10) is causing an accumulation of the PD e ^(−iπdi) ^(d) ^(mν) ⁰    [MF110] because of its group-theoretic property like (12). Hence the PDs directly weaken the output of the receiver and give a serious deterioration in “synchronisation” needed in digital communication systems [3]. On the contrary, the main concern is the design of the prototype function x(t) to reduce inter-symbol interference (ISI) and inter-channel interference (ICI). Such simple observation provides a starting point for this study.

3. Likelihood Functionals and Cross-Correlation Functions

To begin with, we have to study a brief review of Woodward's [15] statistical approach to the analysis and design of optimum radar systems, and Helstrom's [18] comprehensive study on theory and practice of signal detection and estimation.

It is an important observation that these approaches used only Abelian harmonic analysis as Auslander and Tolimieri's remark on Wilcox's study [16].

However, the fundamentals of radar theory reside in the following signal detection and parameter estimation theory.

<3.1 Signal Detection>

When a radar signal appears in a receiver, its detection is made uncertain by the simultaneous presence of noise.

Consider the simplest signal-detection problem, that of deciding whether a signal s(t) of specified form has arrived at a definite time in the midst of Gaussian noise n(t). An input w(t) to the receiver is measured during an observation interval 0≤t≤T.   [MF111]

On the basis of this input an observer must choose one of two hypotheses, H₀, “there is no signal,” i.e., w(t)=n(t), and H₁, “the signal is present,” i.e., w(t)=s(t)+n(t). When W_(k)=w(t_(k)) is measured at time t=t_(k) during the observation interval, the n samples w_(k) are random variables having a joint probability density function (p.d.f.) p_(i)(w) under hypotheses H_(i), i=0, 1, and the observer's decision is best made on the basis of the likelihood ratio Λ(w)=p₁(w)/p₀(w), w=(w₁, . . . , w_(n)).

For a fixed decision level Λ₀ the observer chooses hypothesis H₀ if Λ (w)<A₀; H₁ if Λ (w)>Λ₀.

A radar signal can be written simply as [15, 18] s(t)=

ψ(t)e ^(iΩt)   [MF112] where ψ(t) is its CE and Ω=2πf_(c) the carrier frequency. If the spectrum of the signal s(t) S(f)=F[s(t)]=½[Ψ(f−f _(c))+Ψ*(−f−f _(c))],Ψ(f)=F[ψ(f)]   [MF113] exhibits two narrow peaks, one near the frequency f_(c) and the other near −f_(c), and if the widths of the bands are much smaller than Ω, the signal is termed narrowband (NB) or quasi-harmonic.

Assume that the input to the receiver w(t)=

ψ_(m)(t)e ^(iΩt)   [MF114] is NB and the CE ψ_(w)(t)   [MF115] can be measured by a mixer.

In the presence of stationary NB white Gaussian noise with the auto-covariance function ϕ(τ)=

{tilde over (ϕ)}(τ)e ^(iΩτ),{tilde over (ϕ)}(τ)=N ₀δ(τ),   [MF116] an optimum detector of the NB signal s(t)=

ψ(t)e ^(i(Ωt+φ))   [MF117] has the logarithm of its LF (LLF) [18, p. 106]

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 118} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{{\ln\;{\Lambda\left\lbrack {\psi_{w}(t)} \right\rbrack}} = {g - \frac{d^{2}}{2}}},{g = {\frac{e - {i\;\varphi}}{N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{\psi^{*}(t)}{\psi_{w}(t)}{dt}}}}},{d^{2} = {\frac{1}{N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{{\psi(t)}}^{2}{dt}}}}},} & (13) \end{matrix}$ in which N₀ is the unilateral spectral density of the white noise, g, being generated by passing the input ψ_(w)(t) through a filter [19] matched to the signal ψ(t) to be detected, and d² are referred to as the statistic and the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the LF Λ[ψ_(w)(t)]. <3.2 Estimation of Signal Parameters>

The principle in hypothesis testing can be applied to choices among multiple hypotheses as follows. Suppose that a transmitter is sending a signal using one of M signals. The receiver is to decide which of these M signals is present during the observation interval (0,T). Namely, under hypothesis H_(k), “a signal S_(k)(t) was sent”, an input to the receiver is [MF119] w(t)=s _(k)(t)+n(t),s _(k)(t)=

ψ_(k)(t)e ^(i(2πf) ^(x) ^(t+φ) ^(k) ⁾,1≤k≤M,  (14) where ψ_(k)(t) is the NB CE, f_(k) the carrier, φ_(k)   [MF120] denotes the phase of s_(k)(t), and n(t) random noise.

The receiver chooses one of the M hypotheses on the basis of measurements of its input w(t). Suppose that the receiver makes n measurements w₁, . . . , w_(u) of its input w(t). Let p_(k)(w) be the joint p.d.f. of these data under hypothesis H_(k) and let ζ_(k) be the prior probability of that hypothesis. The likelihood ratio for detecting the k th signal in the presence of n(t) is defined by Λ_(k)(w)=p_(k)(w)/p₀(w), where p₀(w) denotes the p.d.f. under a dummy hypothesis. For simplicity, assume that ζ_(k)=M⁻¹, under the orthogonality of the signals s_(k)(t) ∫₀ ^(T) s* _(i)(t)s _(j)(t)dt=E _(i)δ_(ij)   [MF121] (E_(i) is the energy of the i th signal) then the receiver simply decides H_(k) if Λ_(k)(w)>Λ_(j)(w), for all k≠j.

Denote the unknown parameters of the signal by θ₁, . . . , θ_(m) and represent them by a vector θ=(θ₁, . . . , θ_(m)) in an m-dimensional parameter space, designated by Θ. A radar echo can be represented in the form [MF122] s _(echo)(t;A,κ,t _(d) ,f _(D))=A

e ^(iκ)ψ(t−t _(d))e ^(i2πf) ^(c) ^((t−t) ^(d) ⁾ ,f _(c) =f _(r) +f _(D)  (15) where Ae^(1κ) denotes the attenuation factor, A its amplitude, t_(d) its time of arrival, f_(c) its carrier frequency, κ the phase of its carrier, and f_(D) the Doppler shift of its reference carrier f_(r). Unknown parameters in the echo signal (15) are given as θ=(A, κ, t_(d), f_(D)). When w(t)=

ψ_(w)(t)e ^(i2πf,l)   [MF123] and the noise is white with unilateral spectral density N₀, the LLF [18, p. 251] is

     [MF 124] ${\ln\;{\Lambda\left\lbrack {{w(t)};\theta} \right\rbrack}} = {{\Re\left\lbrack {\frac{A}{N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{\psi^{*}\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}e^{{- {i2}}\;\pi\;{f_{D}{({t - t_{d}})}}}{\psi_{w}(t)}{dt}}}} \right\rbrack} - {\frac{A^{2}}{2N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{{\psi\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}}^{2}{{dt}.}}}}}$

Using a change of variables such as Ae ^(iκ) =u+iv,u=

Ae ^(iκ) ,v=ℑAe ^(iκ)   [MF125] Here ℑ   [MF126] denotes the imaginary part of the complex number following it. Thus one gets the maximum likelihood estimate (MLE) of A, κ containing θ′=(t_(d), f_(D)), given by [18, p. 251].

⁢[ MF ⁢ ⁢ 127 ] A ^ ⁡ ( θ ′ ) ⁢ e i ⁢ ⁢ ( θ ′ ) = u ^ + i ⁢ v ^ = z ⁡ ( θ ′ ) d 2 ⁡( θ ′ ) , u ^ + ℜ ⁢ A ^ ⁡ ( θ ′ ) , v ^ = 𝔍 ⁢ A ^ ⁡ ( θ ′ ) i ⁢ ⁡ ( θ ′ ) , z ⁡ ( θ ′ ) = 1 N 0 ⁢ ∫ 0 T ⁢ ψ * ⁡ ( t - t d ) ⁢ e - i ⁢ ⁢ 2 ⁢ ⁢ π ⁢ ⁢ f D ⁡ ( t - t ) ⁢ψ w ⁡ ( t ) ⁢ dt , d 2 ⁡ ( θ ′ ) = 1 N 0 ⁢ ∫ 0 T ⁢  ψ ⁡ ( t - t d )  2 ⁢ dt . } ( 16 ) The MLEs of the remaining parameters θ′ are those that maximize [18, p. 251]

[MF 128] ${\max\limits_{u,v}{\ln\;{\Lambda\left\lbrack {{{w(t)}❘u},v,\theta^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}}} = {\frac{{{z\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)}}^{2}}{2\;{d^{2}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)}}.}$ Hence one can concentrate one's efforts on estimating the θ′. For one of a closely spaced set of values of the Doppler shift

[MF 129] ${f_{D} \in \left( {{- \frac{W_{D}}{2}},\frac{W_{D}}{2}} \right)},$ the MLE θ′ could be obtained by building a bank of parallel filters, each matched to a signal of the form

ψ(t)e ^(i2π(f) ^(r) ^(+f) ^(D) ^()t)   [MF130] where W_(D) is the maximum range of the expected Doppler shift. It is, however, not easy to examine statistics by constructing a bank of NB filters in parallel. This fact leads one to decompose the 2-unknown-parameter problem into 2 single-unknown-parameter problems.

Let us rewrite (15) and its FT in the form s _(echo)(t;A,κ,t _(d) ,f _(D))=A

e ^(iκ) T _(t) _(d) _(,f) _(D) T _(0,f),ψ(t)e ^(iφ0), S _(echo)(f;A,κ,t _(d) ,f _(D))=A

e ^(iκ) T _(f) _(D) _(,−t) _(d) ^(f)Ψ(f)e ^(iφ0),Ψ(f)=F[ψ(t)],   [MF131] where T _(t) _(d) _(,f) _(D)    [MF132] is a von Neumann's TFSO with t_(d) and f_(D) where ψ(t),φ₀   [MF133] denote the CE to be designed and its phase (its detail is omitted here), and T _(D,f),ψ(t)   [MF134] a passband signal shifted from the baseband CE by the reference frequency f_(r).

Using pulse code techniques with the TD-PC of period N and the FD-PC of period N′, one can want to make clear the exact location of (t_(d), f_(D)) in a 2-dimensional lattice T _(C) Z×F _(c) Z   [MF135] in the TFP, where T_(c)=T_(s)/N, F_(c)=F_(s)/N′, T_(s), and F_(s) denote a chip-pulse spacing, chip(sub-) carrier-spacing, signal (or data)-duration, and carrier-spacing, Divide the (t_(d), f_(D))-parameter space Θ′ into a large number NN′ of small rectangular regions Δ^(q→) _(m,m′) with the data address q =(q,q′),   [MF136] defined as [MF137] Δ_(m,m′) ^(if)={(t _(d) ,f _(D))∈

² |mT _(c) ≤t _(d) −qT _(s)<(m+1)T _(c), m′F _(c) ≤f _(D) −q′F _(s)<(m′+1)F _(c)}, 0≤m≤N−1,0≤m′≤N′−1  (17) and denote by H_(m,m′) the proposition “The parameter set θ′ lies in region Δ_(m,m′) ^({right arrow over (q)}).”   [MF138]

However, NN′ such hypotheses H_(m,m′) can be decomposed into N′ hypotheses for estimating f_(D) in the TD signal s_(echo)(t; A, κ, t_(d), f_(D)) and N hypotheses for estimating t_(d) in the FD signal S_(echo)(f; A, κ, t_(d), f_(D)) as discussed below.

Provided that the signals S_(k)(t;θ′) are orthogonal, in hypothesis H_(k) associated with (14), for the CE ψ_(k)(t) and phase φ_(k);   [MF139] consider the kth NB echo signal s _(k)(t;θ′)=A

e ^(iκ)ψ_(k)(t−t _(d))e ^(i2πtf) ^(k) ^(+f) ^(D) ^()(t−t) ^(d) ^()+iφ) ^(k)    [MF140] If the noise is white and Gaussian with unilateral spectral density No, then its TD-LLF [18, p. 129, p. 251] is

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 141} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{\ln\;{\Lambda_{k}\left\lbrack {{{w(t)};A},\kappa,\theta^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}} = {{g_{k}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)} - \frac{d_{k}^{2}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)}{2}}},{{d_{k}^{2}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)} = {\frac{A^{2}}{N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{{\psi_{k}\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}}^{2}{dt}}}}},} & (18) \\ {{g_{k}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)} = {\Re\frac{{Ae}^{- {i{({\kappa + \varphi_{k}})}}}}{N_{0}}{\int_{0}^{T}{{\psi_{k}^{*}\left( {t - t_{d}} \right)}e^{{- i}\; 2{\pi{({f_{k} + f_{D} - f_{r}})}}{({t - t_{d}})}}{\psi_{w}(t)}{{dt}.}}}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Let k=k₀ be an integer satisfying

[MF 142] ${\max\limits_{1 \leq k \leq M}\frac{{g_{k}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)}}{d_{k}\left( \theta^{\prime} \right)}} > r_{0}$ for a given decision level r₀; Then the receiver decides the kth signal has been arrived; If all statistics g_(k) lie below r₀, the receiver decides that no signal was transmitted. This is referred to as an ML receiver. Hence a construction of orthogonal signals s_(k)(t) is of crucial importance. Equation (18) suggests two ways of maximizing |g_(k)(θ′)|: one is maximizing the integrand and the other is canceling out the phase factors e^(iκ) of the carrier and e ^(iφb)   [MF143] of the signal s_(k)(t). The phase factor, however, is usually absorbed into ψ_(k)(t)   [MF144] by re-definition; moreover not g_(k)(θ′) but |g_(k)(θ′)| is simply evaluated. These strategies annihilate the phase information. Woodward [15] used a two-dimensional CCF, called the ambiguity function (AF), early defined by Ville [14], that plays a central role in the radar signal design. It is given by the definition

$\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 145} \right\rbrack\begin{matrix} {{{\theta_{xy}\left( {\tau,v} \right)} = {\int_{- \infty}^{\infty}{{x\left( {t + \frac{\tau}{2}} \right)}{y^{*}\left( {t - \frac{\tau}{2}} \right)}e^{{- i}\; 2\;\pi\;{vt}}{dt}}}},} \\ {{{\Theta_{XY}\left( {v,{- \tau}} \right)} = {\int_{- \infty}^{\infty}{{X\left( {f + \frac{v}{2}} \right)}{Y^{*}\left( {f - \frac{v}{2}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\;\pi\; f\;\tau}{df}}}},} \\ {{{X(f)} = {\mathcal{F}\left\lbrack {x(t)} \right\rbrack}},{{Y(f)} = {{\mathcal{F}\left\lbrack {y(t)} \right\rbrack}.}}} \end{matrix}$ Non-commutative and group-theoretic properties of WHG-based time-frequency-shifted waveforms are manifested in the cisoidal factors in (9). In addition, one can get:

-   Proposition 3 [Property 3 of symmetric TFSOs]: For a TD signal z(t)     and its FT     Z(f)=f[z(t)],   [MF146]     the inner product (IP)s between the TD and FD time-frequency-shifted     signals can be expressed as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {M\; F\; 147} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{< {\mathcal{T}_{t_{1},f_{1}}{z(t)}}},{{{\mathcal{T}_{t_{2},f_{2}}{z(t)}} >_{t}} = {e^{{- i}\;\pi}{\begin{matrix} t_{1} & f_{1} \\ t_{2} & f_{2} \end{matrix}}{\theta_{2,z}\left( {{t_{2} - t_{1}},{f_{2} - f_{1}}} \right)}}},} \\ {{< {\mathcal{T}_{f_{1},{- t_{1}}}^{f}{Z(f)}}},{{{\mathcal{T}_{f_{2},{- t_{2}}}^{f}{Z(f)}} >_{t}} = {e^{{- i}\;\pi}{\begin{matrix} t_{1} & f_{1} \\ t_{2} & f_{2} \end{matrix}}{\Theta_{Z,Z}\left( {{f_{2} - f_{1}},{{- t_{2}} + t_{1}}} \right)}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (19) \end{matrix}$ where <r(t),s(t)>_(t)=∫_(. . . ∞) ^(∞) r(t)s*(t)dt   [MF148] denotes the TD IP of r(t) and s(t), and the FD IP <R(f),S(f)>_(f)=∫_(. . . ∞) ^(∞) R(f)S*(f)df=<r(t),s(t)>_(i)   [MF149] of R(f)=F[r(t)]   [MF150] and S(f)=F[s(t)],   [MF151]

Equation (19) shows that: i) both the real parts of the TD and FD IPs are maximized when t₂=t₁ and f₂=f₁, for which the maxima of the AF are attained; ii) if the left and right terms of the IP are thought of as the input signal ψ_(w)(t) and a signal ψ(t) to be detected, respectively of the statistic g in LLF (13), then ψ(t) may cancel-out the input signal's PD to enhance the statistic g. Proposition 3 emphasizes the importance of “phase” of a modulated signal like the “phasors” used in analysing alternating currents and voltages in electrical engineering [18, xv, p. 91], and tells us that two quantities t_(d) and f_(D) always appear in a phase term. This is a major step toward (t_(d), f_(D))-estimations in the TD and FD, based on the WHG theory, in distinct contrast to the conventional methods using matched filters [18], performed only in the TD. If one can design a signal so that its phase terms have been endowed with easy-traceability, one may utilize the both the PDs of ψ_(w)(t), ψ(t) of the statistic in the TD- and FD-LLFs.

Gabor [1] stressed the importance of analysis in the TFP and the utility of the Gaussian wave 2^(1/4) e^(−πtΛ2) attaining the lower bound of the uncertainty relation of time and frequency.

He gave the time-frequency representation of a function f:

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 152} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{f(t)} = {\sum\limits_{n,{m \in {\mathbb{Z}}}}{a_{m,n}{g_{m \cdot n}(t)}}}},{a_{m,n} = {< g_{m,n}}},{f >_{t}},m,{n \in {\mathbb{Z}}},} \\ {{{g_{m,n}(t)} = {{g\left( {t - {n\;\tau_{0}}} \right)}e^{2\;\pi\;{imv}_{0}t}}},{{\tau_{0}v_{0}} = 1},m,{n \in {{\mathbb{Z}}.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (20) \end{matrix}$ It is well known [9, p. 985] that the set of Gaussian functions g_(m,n)(t) forms a basis of L²(R) having good properties regarding time and frequency localization but this basis is not orthonormal and the set of the functions is not even a frame [7]. See [7, 9] for a review on the double series representation (20). Most of communication engineers does not employ a Gaussian function primarily because it does not satisfy the Nyquist condition. In our (t_(d), f_(D))-estimation problem, however, several favourable properties of Gaussians in the TFP play an important role. <4. Signature waveforms and templates in TD and FD>

TD-PC techniques, i.e., spreading spectrum (SS) techniques [3] can provide the simultaneous use of a wide frequency band, via code-division multiple access (CDMA) techniques, in which a signal to be transmitted s(t) is modulated by an independent pulse code c(t) so that its bandwidth is much greater than that of the message signal m(t), e.g., s(t)=m(t)c(t) and each user is assigned a pulse code such that the signals are orthogonal.

In order for the CE ψ(t)   [MF153] to satisfy the time and frequency symmetrical property (TFSP), its FT Ψ(f) should also be phase coded.

In place of continuous-time signals in

₂(

),   [MF154] consider discrete-time signals in l ₂(

)   [MF155] and assume that a TD signal s(t) is sampled with a sampling interval Δt, while a discrete-frequency signal is obtained by the L-point discrete Fourier transform (DFT). Hence the frequency gap between two adjacent frequency bins in the FD is Δf=1/(LΔt).

Let

[MF 156] $k = \left\lfloor \frac{t}{\Delta\; t} \right\rfloor$ (the truncation of fraction

$\left. {\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 157} \right\rbrack\frac{t}{\Delta\; t}} \right)$ and[MF 158] $\ell = \left\lfloor \frac{f}{\Delta\; f} \right\rfloor$ (the truncation of fraction

$\left. {\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 159} \right\rbrack\frac{f}{\Delta\; f}} \right)$ be discrete variables of time t and frequency f. For the orthogonality of a chip pulse, let assume

[MF 160] $F_{c} = \frac{1}{T_{c}}$ and let T _(c) =MΔt,F _(c) =M′Δf.   [MF161] Thus one can define the L-point twiddle factor

[MF 162] ${W = e^{- \frac{{i2}\;\pi}{L}}},{L = {M\;{M^{\prime}.}}}$

Define the following 7 different kinds of discrete-time and discrete-frequency signals: TD,FD pulse waveforms:g[k],G(l), TD,FD templates:u _(m′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],U _(m) ⁽⁴⁾[l,X′], TD,FD signatures:v[k;X],V[l,X], TD,FD transmit signals:s[k;X],S[l;X], CE of s[k;X],FT of ψ[k;X]:ψ[k;X],Ψ[l;X], TD,FD received signals:r[k;X],R[l;X], CE of r[k;X],FT of ψ_(r)[k;X]:ψ_(r)[k,X],Ψ_(R)[l;X],   [MF163] where X=(X₀, . . . X_(N−1))∈{−1, 1}^(N) is a TD-PC of period N, X′=(X′₀, . . . , X′_(N′−1))∈{−1, 1}^(N′) an FD-PC of period N′, and X=(X, X′).

For a continuous chip-pulse g(t) having support [−LΔt/2,LΔt/2], i.e., duration LΔt, one can obtain its causal discrete-time LΔt-time-limited (TL) chip-pulse g[k] with delay [10] (D/2)Δt,D=L−1,L=(ΔtΔf)⁻¹ =MM′

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 164} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{{g\lbrack k\rbrack} = {\sqrt{\Delta\; t}{g\left( {\left( {k - \frac{D}{2}} \right)\Delta\; t} \right)}}},{{k} \leq {L/2}}} & (21) \end{matrix}$

and define its discrete-frequency LΔf-band-limited (BL) chip-pulse G[l] having support [−LΔf/2, LΔf/2], i.e., bandwidth LΔf, by the DFT of g[k]

[MF 165] ${{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{F}^{d}\left\lbrack {g\lbrack k\rbrack} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{L}}{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{L - 1}{{g\lbrack k\rbrack}W^{k\;\ell}}}}}},{0 \leq \ell \leq {L - 1.}}$

Introduce now a discrete-time TD-signature v[k;χ] and an FD-signature V[l;χ] defined as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 166} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}\mathcal{T}_{0,{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}{u_{m^{\prime}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {k;X} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N}}{\sum_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{X_{m}\mathcal{T}_{0,{- {mM}}}^{f,d}{U_{m}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (22) \end{matrix}$ in terms of a TD-template of type-3 u _(m′) ⁽²⁾[k;X]   [MF167] and an FD-template of type-4

$\begin{matrix} {\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 168} \right\rbrack{{U_{m}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack},{{respectively}\mspace{14mu}{defined}\mspace{14mu}{by}}}} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{u_{m^{\prime}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {k;X} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N}}{\sum_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{X_{m}e^{{- i}\;\pi\;{mm}^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}\Delta\; t\;\Delta\; f}\mathcal{T}_{{mM},0}^{d}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{0 \leq m^{\prime} \leq {N^{\prime} - 1}},}} \\ {{{U_{m}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m}^{\prime}e^{i\;\pi\;{mm}^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}\Delta\; t\;\Delta\; f}\mathcal{T}_{{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}},0}^{f,d}{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{0 \leq m \leq {N - 1}},}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (23) \end{matrix}$ where T _(a,b) ^(d) g[k]   [MF169] and T _(b,−a) ^(f,d) G[l],a,b,k,l∈

   [MF170] denote discrete analogues of von Neumann's TFSOs in the TD and FD in (4), respectively defined by

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 171} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{a,b}^{d}{z\lbrack k\rbrack}} = {{z\left\lbrack {k - a} \right\rbrack}W^{- {b{({k - \frac{a}{2}})}}}}},a,b,{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{b,{- a}}^{\ell,d}{Z\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} = {{Z\left\lbrack {\ell - b} \right\rbrack}W^{a{({\ell - \frac{b}{2}})}}}},a,b,{\ell \in {{\mathbb{Z}}.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (24) \end{matrix}$

The TD-signature v[k;χ] contains N′ TD-templates of type-3 u _(m′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],1≤m′≤N′, while the FD-signature   [MF172] V[l,X]   [MF173] does N FD-templates of type-4 U _(m) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′],1≤m≤N   [MF174] so that the CCF between such a signature and its embedded template may have a large value via the phase coding. Note that the TD-template u _(m′) ⁽³⁾,[k;X]   [MF175] has a rectangular support NMΔt×LΔf in the TFP, while the FD-template U _(m) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′]   [MF176] has a support LΔt×N′M′Δf. Substituting the compositions of TFSOs T _(0,m′M′) ^(d) T _(m,M,0) ^(d) g[k]   [MF177] (resp. T _(0,−mM) ^(l,d) T _(m′,M′,0) ^(l,d) G[l]   [MF178] ) into (22) shows that the TD-signature and FD-signature

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 179} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{NN}^{\prime}}}{\sum_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{\sum_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m}X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}}}}}},{\mathcal{T}_{{mM},{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}},} \\ {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{NN}^{\prime}}}{\sum_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{\sum_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m}{X^{\prime}}_{m}}}}}},{\mathcal{T}_{{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {mM}}}^{f,d}{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (25) \end{matrix}$ are perfectly symmetrical. Suppose that a radar TD-signal s[k;χ] with its CE ψ[k;χ]   [MF180] and the carrier

[MF 181] $\ell_{c} = \left\lfloor \frac{\Omega}{2\;\pi\;\Delta\; f} \right\rfloor$ and its FT, FD-signal S[l;χ] have the form

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 182} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{s\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}W^{{- \ell_{c}}k}}},} \\ {{{S\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{2}\left( {{\Psi\left\lbrack {{\ell - \ell_{c}};\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} + {\Psi^{*}\left\lbrack {{{- \ell} - \ell_{c}};\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}} \right)}},{{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\mathcal{F}^{d}{\left. {\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} \right\rbrack.}}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (26) \end{matrix}$

Writing the CE and its DFT in the form

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 183} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{{d_{\overset{\_}{q}} \cdot \mathcal{T}_{{q\;\mathcal{N}\; M},{q^{\prime}\mathcal{N}^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}}{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{{d_{\overset{\_}{q}} \cdot \mathcal{T}_{{q^{\prime}\;\mathcal{N}^{\prime}\; M^{\prime}},{{- q}\;\mathcal{N}\; M}}^{f,d}}{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (27) \end{matrix}$ one can design the radar TD- and FD-signals s[k;X],S[l;X].   [MF184]

This is a 2-dimensional train of PP′ non-overlapped signatures v[k;X]   [MF185] (resp. V[l:X])   [MF186] of duration T_(s)=NMΔt and carrier-spacing F_(s)=N′M′Δf, where d _({right arrow over (q)})∈

   [MF187] is a data symbol on the lattice T _(s)

×F _(s)

   [MF188] of the TFP, with address {right arrow over (q)}=(q,q′).   [MF189] Namely, a radar system needs PT_(S)×P′F_(S) time-duration-bandwidth to search for targets whose delay t_(d)∈(0, PT_(S)) and Doppler shift.

[MF 190] ${f_{D} \in \left( {{- \frac{W_{D}}{2}},\frac{W_{D}}{2}} \right)},{W_{D} = {P^{\prime}F_{s}}}$ are not known in advance (simply set d_(q→)=1), while a data communication system sends P·P′

-ary data   [MF191] (e.g.,

$\left. {\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 192} \right\rbrack{{d_{\overset{\_}{q}} \in \left\{ e^{i\frac{2\pi}{M}k} \right\}_{k = 0}^{\mathcal{M} - 1}},{1 \leq q \leq P},{1 \leq q^{\prime} \leq P^{\prime}}}} \right).$ Suppose now that such a signal s[k;χ] is transmitted through the channel with

[MF 193] ${\theta^{t,d} = \left( {k_{d},\ell_{D}} \right)},{k_{d} = \left\lfloor \frac{t_{d}}{\Delta\; t} \right\rfloor},{\ell_{D} = {\left\lfloor \frac{f_{D}}{\Delta\; f} \right\rfloor.}}$ Using modulation T _(0,l) _(c) ^(d), demodulation T _(0,−l) _(c) ^(d),   [MF194] one can obtain its received TD signal, being demodulated at a mixer or a homodyne receiver

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 195} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{{r\left\lbrack {{k;\mathcal{X}},A,\kappa,\theta^{t,d}} \right\rbrack} = {{Ae^{i\;\kappa}{\psi_{r}\lbrack k\rbrack}} + {\eta\lbrack k\rbrack} + {\xi\lbrack k\rbrack}}},} \\ {{{\psi_{r}\lbrack k\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{T}_{0,{- \ell_{c}}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{0,\ell_{c}}^{d}{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}} = {W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}{{where}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 196} \right\rbrack}{\psi_{r}\lbrack k\rbrack}} & (28) \end{matrix}$ is the signal component CE in the received signal, η[k] interference, and ξ[k] Gaussian noise. The FD expression, its DFT R[l;X,A,κ,θ′ ^(,d)]=F ^(d)[r;[k;X,A,κ,θ ^(t,d)]].   [MF197] is omitted here. Its PD W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF198] may be absorbed into e^(iK) by re-definition, but should be canceled-out at the correlation receiver as discussed below. Such received TD and FD signals provide the data w and its DFT W, observed in the mixer.

Independent and identically distributed (i.i.d.) TD- and FD-PCs give independent N′ TD-templates u _(m′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],1≤m′≤N′   [MF199] and N FD-templates U _(m) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′],1≤m≤N   [MF200] in the M-ary detection. Note that PCs have two functions: to randomise a signal and to generate several PDs caused by the NCP of TFSs; Fortunately, such a PD itself provides a good indication for parameter estimation in the sense that the transmitted signal is endowed with easy-traceability. This indicates the pros and cons of the use of PCs. In fact, the bandwidth of phase coded systems needs to be much greater than that of a classic radar system; The multi-carrier technique, i.e., the FD-PC multiples this bandwidth by the number of sub-carriers and so requires a super-wide-band signal.

5. M-Ary Detection and Estimation of TD and FD Signals

Let us employ the M-ary detection strategy

using the TD-CE in (27) ψ[k;X]   [MF201] (resp. FD-CE Ψ[l;X])   [MF202] to detect the radar signal in (26) s[k;X]   [MF203] (resp. S[l;X]).   [MF204]

Consider a strategy whereby the receiver chooses among the NN′ hypotheses H_(m,m′) associated with (17). It suffices to find those values of the parameters θ′^(,d) for which the LLF (or the real part of its associated CCF) in the TD (resp. the FD) is maximum. Consider first the problem of detecting the received TD-template CE Ae ^(in) W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ_(p′,{umlaut over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF205] with its address (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}),{right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′)   [MF206] of the lattice in the TFP T _(c)

×F _(c)

,   [MF207] where [MF208] ψ_(ρ′,{umlaut over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]=d _({right arrow over (p)}) T _(pNM,p′N′M′) ^(d) T _(0,ρ′M′) ^(d) X′ _(ρ′) u _(ρ′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],0≤ρ′≤N′−1,  (29) is the TD-template CE of type 3 (cf. (22), (27)) with ρ′-th TD-template X′ _(p′) u _(ρ′) ⁽³⁾[k;X]   [MF209] {circumflex over (k)} _(d)   [MF210] denotes an integer-valued estimate of k_(d), l _(μ)   [MF211] an integer-valued parameter for estimating l _(D).   [MF212] This CE is embedded in the estimated and received CE Ae ^(iκ) W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ[k;X]   [MF213] of ψ[k;X]   [MF214] in (27) (cf. ψ_(r)[k] in (28)), in which the relation T ₀ ₁ _(−l) _(c) ^(d) T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(p) ^(d) T _(0,l) _(c) ^(d) =W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)   [MF215] is used. Equation (29) shows that the CE contains a consequential phase, caused by several PDs as given below. Such a phase should be canceled-out in a CCF. Denote the CE complementary to ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF216] by ψ_(η,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k],0≤ρ′≤N′−1,   [MF217] defined as ψ_(η,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]=Σ_(m′=0,m′≠ρ′) ^(N′−1)ψ_(m′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k], ψ_(η,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]=d _({right arrow over (p)}) T _(ρ′N′M′) ^(d) T _(0,m′M′) ^(d) X′ _(m′) u _(m′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],0≤m′≤N′−1.   [MF218] Equations (22) and (27) indicate that N′ TD-templates of type 3 u _(ρ′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],0≤ρ′≤N′−1   [MF219] are available and the receiver is to use N′ TD-template CEs of type 3 ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k],0≤ρ′≤N′−1   [MF220] and decide which of the N′ TD-LLFs is largest.

i) Discrete-time signal detection and Doppler-ML estimation problem in the TD: On the basis of measured values of the N_(T) random variables w=(w[0], . . . , w[N_(T)−1]), the receiver must choose between two hypotheses,

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 221} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{{H_{0}\text{:}{\psi_{w}\lbrack k\rbrack}} = {\psi_{n}\lbrack k\rbrack}},} \\ {{{H_{1}\text{:}{\psi_{w}\lbrack k\rbrack}} = {{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{\mu}}^{d}\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{{p = 0},{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}\left( {{\psi_{p^{\prime},\overset{\_}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack} + {\psi_{n,p^{\prime},\overset{\_}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}} \right)}} + {\psi_{n}\lbrack k\rbrack}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{79mu}{{0 \leq k \leq {N_{T} - 1}},{0 \leq \rho^{\prime} \leq {N^{\prime} - 1}},}} & (30) \end{matrix}$ where ψ_(w)[k]   [MF222] is the NB CE of the observation data

[MF 223] ${w\lbrack k\rbrack} = {= \left\lfloor \frac{\Omega}{2\;\pi\;\Delta\; f} \right\rfloor}$ at time k, ψ_(u)[k]   [MF224] the NB CE of white Gaussian noise n[k]=

ψ_(n)[k]W ^(−l,k)   [MF225] N _(T) =└T/Δt┘>>1   [MF226] the number of samples during the observation duration (0,T). Note that the signal component in hypothesis H₁ is equal to

[MF 227] $\left( N^{\prime} \right)^{\frac{1}{2}}{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{c}}^{d}{{\psi\left\lbrack {k;X} \right\rbrack}.}$ Suppose that N′ TD-template CEs of type 3 ψ_(m′,g) ⁽³⁾[k],0≤m′≤N′−1   [MF228] of equal energies are quasi-orthogonal in the sense that

[MF 229] ${{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{N_{T - 1}}\;{{\psi_{m_{1}^{\prime},\overset{\_}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}{\psi_{m_{2}^{\prime},\overset{\_}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}}} ⪡ 1},{m_{1}^{\prime} \neq {m_{2}^{\prime}.}}$ Then one can obtain:

Proposition 4: ii) Signal detection and Doppler-ML estimation problem in the TD: On the basis of observed data w=(w[0], . . . , w[N₁−1]) in the presence of white Gaussian noise with unilateral spectral density N₀, the logarithm of the (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF230] -th TD-LF for detecting and estimating the TD-template CE of type 3 Ae ^(ix) W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) ·T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(p) ^(d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF231] is given as [21]

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF232} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{{ln\Lambda}_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\left\lbrack {{{w\lbrack k\rbrack};A},\kappa,{{\hat{k}}_{d};\ell_{\mu}}} \right\rbrack} = {{g_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\left( {A,\kappa,{{\hat{k}}_{d};\ell_{\mu}}} \right)} - \frac{d_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{2}}{2}}},} \\ {{{g_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\left( {A,\kappa,{{\hat{k}}_{d};\ell_{\mu}}} \right)} = {\frac{{Ae}^{{- i}\;\kappa}W^{{- {\hat{k}}_{d}}\ell_{c}}}{N_{0}\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{p,{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{N_{T}} - 1}{\left( {\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}{\psi_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}} \right)^{*}W^{\alpha{({{k\;:{\hat{k}}_{d}},\ell_{\mu}})}}{\psi_{w}\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}}},} \\ {{d_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{2} = {\frac{A^{2}}{N_{0}\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{{\sum_{p,{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{\Delta\; t{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{N_{T}} - 1}{\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}{\psi_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}}}^{2}}},} \end{matrix} \\ \; \end{matrix} \right\} & (31) \\ {\mspace{79mu}{\text{where}\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF233} \right\rbrack}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{\alpha\left( {{k\text{:}\mspace{14mu}{\hat{k}}_{d}},\ell_{\mu}} \right)} = {{- {\ell_{\mu}\left( {k - \frac{{\hat{k}}_{d}}{2}} \right)}} + {{\ell_{D}\left( {k - {\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}.}}}} & \; \end{matrix}$

Let ρ′=ρ′₀ and l _(p) =l* _(μ)   [MF234] be integers for a given decision level r₀ satisfying

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\text{[MF235]}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{{\max\limits_{p^{\prime},\ell_{\mu}}\frac{{g_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime}\left( {\hat{A},\hat{\kappa},{{\hat{k}}_{d};\ell_{\mu}}} \right)}}{d_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}}} > r_{0}},{1 \leq \rho^{\prime} \leq N^{\prime}},{{g_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime}\left( {\hat{A},\hat{\kappa},{{\hat{k}}_{d};\ell_{\mu}}} \right)} = {= {\frac{{Ae}^{{- i}\;\kappa}W^{{- {\hat{k}}_{d}}\ell_{c}}}{\hat{A}e^{{- i}\;\kappa}N_{0}\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{p,{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{N_{T}} - 1}{\left( {\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}{\psi_{p^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}} \right)^{*}W^{\alpha{({{k\;:{\hat{k}}_{d}},\ell_{\mu}})}}{\psi_{w}\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}}}},}} & (32) \end{matrix}$ where g′ _(ρ′{right arrow over (p)})(Â,{circumflex over (κ)},{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;l _(μ))   [MF236] is a compensated variant of the statistic in (31) g′ _(ρ′{right arrow over (p)})(A,κ,{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;l _(μ))   [MF237] by the MLE in (16) Âe ^(−i{circumflex over (κ)})   [MF238] of Ae^(−iκ). Then the receiver decides the (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF239] -th CE has been arrived at the address (p′,p^(→)) of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

   [MF240] in the TFP and if all statistics |g′ _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})({circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,Â,{circumflex over (κ)};l _(μ))|/d _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF241] lie below r₀, the receiver decides that no signal was transmitted. Thus l* _(μ)   [MF242] is an ML estimate of lμ   [MF243] for a given {circumflex over (k)} _(d)   [MF244] in which the use of the operator T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)   [MF245] needs the phase function W ^(a(k;{circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(,l) ^(μ) ^().)   [MF246]

Next one moves on the detection and delay-estimation problem in the FD using the DFT of the measured w,

[MF 247] ${{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{F}^{d}\left\lbrack {w\lbrack k\rbrack} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N_{T}}}{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{N_{T} - 1}\;{{w\lbrack k\rbrack}W^{kl}}}}}},{0 \leq \ell \leq {N_{T} - 1.}}$ Let us consider the problem of detecting the received FD-template CE Ae ^(in) W ^(k) ^(u) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(l,d)Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]   [MF248] with its address (ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF249] of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

,   [MF250] where [MF251] Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]=d _({right arrow over (p)}) T _(p′N′M′,−pNM) ^(l,d) ,T _(0,−ρM) ^(l,d) X _(ρ) U _(ρ) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′],0≤ρ≤N−1  (33) is the FD-template CE of type 4 (cd. (22), (27)) with ρ-th FD-template of type 4 X _(ρ) U _(ρ) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′]   [MF252] This CE is embedded in the estimated and received FD-CE Ae ^(iκ) W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(C) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(f,d)Ψ[l;X]   [MF253] of the FD-CE, i.e., the DFT in (27) Ψ[l;X],   [MF254] where {circumflex over (l)} _(D)   [MF255] is an integer-valued estimate of l _(D),   [MF256] k_(σ) an integer-valued parameter for estimating k_(d), and the relation T _(. . . l) _(c) _(,0) ^(f,d) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(, . . . k) _(σ) ^(f,d) T _(l) _(c) _(,0) ^(f,d) =W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(, . . . k) _(σ) ^(f,d)   [MF257] is used. Denote the CE complementary to

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\text{[MF258]}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\text{by}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\text{[MF259]}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{\Psi_{\eta,\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack},{0 \leq \rho \leq {N - 1}},}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF260} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\Psi_{\eta,\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {\sum_{{m = 0},{m \neq \rho}}^{N - 1}{\Psi_{m,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}},} \\ {{{\Psi_{m,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}\; N^{\prime}\; M^{\prime}},{{- p}\; N\; M}}^{f,d}\;\mathcal{T}_{0,{- {mM}}}^{f,d}\; X_{m}{U_{m}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}}},{0 \leq m \leq {N - 1.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (34) \end{matrix}$

Equations (22) and (27) suggest that N FD-templates of type 4 U _(ρ) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′],0≤ρ≤N−1   [MF261] are available and the receiver is to use N FD-template CEs of type 4 Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾ └l┘,0≤ρ≤N−1   [MF262] and decide which of the N LLFs is largest (FIG. 3b ).

ii) Signal detection and delay-ML estimation problem in the FD:

On the basis of observed W=(W[0], . . . , W[N₁−1]), the receiver must choose between two hypotheses in the FD,

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF263} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{{H_{0}^{\prime}\text{:}\mspace{14mu}{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} = {N\lbrack\ell\rbrack}},} \\ {{{H_{1}^{\prime}\text{:}\mspace{14mu}{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} = {{\frac{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}\;{\sum\limits_{{p = 0},{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}\left( {{S_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} + {E_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} \right)}} + {N\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{79mu}{{0 \leq \ell \leq {N_{B} - 1}},{0 \leq \rho \leq {N - 1}},}} & (35) \\ {\mspace{79mu}\text{where}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF264} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {F^{d}\left\lbrack {{\psi_{w}\lbrack k\rbrack}W^{{- \ell_{r}}k}} \right\rbrack}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ is the DFT of the observed data w[k] with the NB CE ψ_(w)[k],   [MF265] N[l]=F ^(d)[

ψ_(n)[k]W ^(−l,k)]   [MF266] the DFT of the noise n[k] with the NB CE ψ_(u)[k],   [MF267] N _(B) =└B/Δf┘   [MF268] the sample number of the bandwidth B, for simplicity N_(B)=N_(T); S _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]=F ^(d)[

F ^(−1,d)[Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]W ^(−l) ^(c) ^(k)]]   [MF269] the (ρ,{circumflex over (p)})   [MF270] -th template signal spectrum with its FD-template CE of type 4 in (33) Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^((4)[l],)   [MF271] and E _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]=F ^(d)[

F ^(−1,d)[Ψ_(n,ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]W ^(−l) ^(c) ^(k)]]   [MF272] its complement spectrum with CE in (34) Ψ_(n,ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l],   [MF273] Note that the signal component in hypothesis H′₁ is equal to

[MF 274] $(N)^{\frac{1}{2}}{{Ae}\;}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\;\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}\;{{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;X} \right\rbrack}.}$ Suppose that N FD-template CEs of type 4 (cf. (22), (27)) Ψ_(m,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l],0≤m≤N−1   [MF275] of equal enemies are quasi-orthogonal in the sense that

[MF 276] ${{\sum\limits_{\ell = 0}^{N_{B} - 1}{{\Psi_{m_{1},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}{\Psi_{m_{2},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}} ⪡ 1},{m_{1} \neq {m_{2}.}}$ Then one can obtain:

Proposition 5: On the basis of data W=(W[0], . . . ,W[N _(T)−1]),W[l]=F ^(d)[w[k]]   [MF277] in the presence of white Gaussian noise with unilateral spectral density N₀, the logarithm of the (ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF278] -th FD-LF for detecting and estimating S _(ρ,p) ⁽⁴⁾[l]   [MF279] is given as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF280} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{\ln\;{\Lambda_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime}\left\lbrack {{{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack};A},\kappa,{{\hat{\ell}}_{D};k_{\sigma}}} \right\rbrack}} = {{G_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\left( {A,\kappa,{{\hat{\ell}}_{D};k_{\sigma}}} \right)} - \frac{D_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{2}}{2}}},\mspace{79mu}{D_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{2} = {\frac{A^{2}}{N_{0}\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{{\sum\limits_{p,{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{\Delta\; f{\sum\limits_{\ell = 0}^{N_{B} - 1}{\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}{S_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}}}}^{2}}},{{G_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\left( {A,\kappa,{{\hat{\ell}}_{D};k_{\sigma}}} \right)} = {\frac{{Ae}^{{- i}\;\kappa}W^{{- k_{\sigma}}\ell_{c}}}{N_{0}\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{p,{p^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{\times \Delta\; f{\sum\limits_{\ell = 0}^{N_{B} - 1}{\left( {\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}{S_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}} \right)^{*}W^{\beta{({{\ell:{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},k_{\sigma}})}}{W\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}}}}},} & (36) \\ {\mspace{79mu}\text{where}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack \text{MF281} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{\beta\left( {{\ell\text{:}\mspace{14mu}{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},k_{\sigma}} \right)} = {\left( {\ell - \frac{{\hat{\ell}}_{D}}{2}} \right) - {{k_{d}\left( {\ell - {\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}.}}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Let ρ−ρ₀ and k _(σ) =k ₀ ^(N)   [MF282] be integers satisfying

⁢[MF283] ⁢ max ⁢  G ρ , p → ′ ⁡ ( A , κ , ℓ ^ D ; k σ )  D ρ , p → > r 0 ′ , 1 ≤ ρ ≤ N , ⁢ G ρ , p → ′ ⁡ ( A , κ ^ , ℓ ^ d ; k σ ) = = A ⁢ ⁢ e - i ⁢ ⁢ κ ⁢ W - k σ ⁢ ℓ c A ^ ⁢ e - i ⁢ ⁢ κ ^ ⁢ N 0 ⁢ PP ′ ⁢ Δ ⁢ ⁢ f ⁢ ∑ ℓ = 0 ⁢ ( 𝒯 ℓ ^ D , - k σ f , d ⁢ S ρ , p → ( 4 ) ⁡ [ ℓ ] ) * ⁢ W β ⁡ ( ℓ : ℓ ^ D , k σ ) ⁢ W ⁡ [ ℓ ] ( 37 ) for a given decision level r′₀. Then the receiver decides the (ρ,p→)-th signal has been arrived at the address (ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF284] of the lattice in the TFP T _(c)

×F _(c)

   [MF285] and if all statistics |G _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^(n)(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D) ,Â,{circumflex over (κ)})|/D _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF286] lie below r′₀, the receiver decides that no signal was transmitted. Thus k _(σ) ^(n)   [MF287] is a ML estimate of k _(d) for a given {circumflex over (l)} _(D),   [MF288] in which the use of the operator T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(l,d)   [MF289] needs the phase function W ^(β(l:{circumflex over (l)}) ^(Tj) ^(,k) ^(ζT) ⁾   [MF290] an FD analogue of the W ^(α(k:{circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(,{circumflex over (l)}) ^(μ) ⁾   [MF291] so one can get (36) and (37).

6. TD and FD Cross-Correlations for Parameter Estimation

<6.1 TD and FD Cross-Correlations>

Suppose that the observed input w ^((t))=

ψ_(w)(t)e ^(iΩt)   [MF292] is NB and both the real and imaginary parts of the CE ψ_(w)(t)   [MF293] can be measured separately [18, 3].

In order to cancel out the phase factors of Ae ^(iκ) W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) ·T _({circumflex over (k)},) ₃ _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF294] (resp. Ae ^(iκ) W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(, . . . k) _(σ) ^(f,d)ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l])   [MF295] and get a time and frequency symmetrical statistic,

instead of the statistic in (31) g _(ρ′,{right arrow over (q)})({circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,l _(μ))   [MF296] having W ^(α)(k:{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,l _(μ))   [MF297] (resp. the statistic in (36) G _(ρ,{circumflex over (p)})(k _(σ) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF298] having W ^(β(l:k) ^(u) ^(,{circumflex over (l)}) ^(D) ⁾)   [MF299] one can use its associated CCF to be defined below (see FIG. 3b ):

Lemma 1: Suppose that in two hypotheses H₀ and H₁ in (30) the CE ψ_(u)[k]   [MF300] is Gaussian. Then <ψ_(n),ψ_(ρ,{circumflex over (p)}) ⁽³⁾ >d,k<<1   [MF301] where <⋅,⋅>_(d,k) denotes the IP in the space l ₂(

)   [MF302] of discrete-time TD functions. Thus one can define a CCF, called a type-3 correlator, between the received CE T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)ψ[k;X]   [MF303] (namely, the signal component of the received CE in (28) ψ _(x) [k;X]   [MF304] with factor Ae ^(in) E ^(k) ^(f) ^(l) ^(c) )   [MF305] instead of the input CE ψ_(w)[k;X]   [MF306] to the receiver, and the complex impulse response of a NB filter matched to the estimated template CE with address (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF307] W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]]_(d) _(β) ₌₁   [MF308] given as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 309} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}} \times {\sum\limits_{k\;\epsilon\;{\mathbb{Z}}}^{\;}\;{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}\left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\;\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}\;\mathcal{T}_{{p\; N\; M},{p^{\prime}\; N^{\prime}\; M^{\prime}}}^{d}\;\mathcal{T}_{0,{\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}Y_{0,\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}{u_{\rho^{\prime}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {k:Y} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}}}}} & (38) \end{matrix}$ in which the TD-template CE of type 3 in (29) ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF310] and the codes X′_(ρ′),X are replaced by Y′_(ρ′),Y.

One can find after some labor that this CCF of type 3 is given as

⁢[ MF311 ] c ρ ′ , p → ( 3 ) ⁡ ( ℓ μ ; k ^ d ) = Ae i ⁢ ⁢ κ ⁢ W ( k d - k ^ d ) ⁢ ℓ c PP ′ ⁢ ∑ ⁢ d q → ⁢ Y ρ ′ l , * N ⁢ N ′ ⁢ ∑ m = 0 , m ′ = 0 , n = 0 N - 1 , N ′ - 1 , N - 1 ⁢ ⁢ X m ⁢ X m ′ , Y n * × θ gg ⁡ [ ( k ^ d - k d ) + ( p - q ) ⁢ MN + ( n - m ) ⁢ M , ( ℓ μ - ℓ D ) + ( p ′ - q ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ⁢ N ′ + ( ρ ′ - m ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ] × W 1 2 ⁢ ( k d ⁢ ℓ μ - k ^ d ⁢ ℓ D + 2 ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ N ⁢ ⁢ q ⁢ ⁢ v 0 ⁡[ ℓ μ ] - 2 ⁢ M ′ ⁢ N ′ ⁢ q ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] ) × W 1 2 ⁢ ( ( m ⁢ ⁢ ρ ′ - m ′ ⁢ n ) ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ M ′ - ( m ′ + ρ ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] + ( m + n ) ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ v 0 ⁡ [ ℓ μ ] ) . ( 39 )

Unfortunately, the AFs θ_(gg)(τ,ν) and Θ_(GG)(ν,−τ) have many sidelobes in general. A Gaussian chip-pulse g(t), however, gives a radical solution to the estimation problems because it has its separable and exponentially decayed AF in terms of of τ and ν

[MF 312] ${{\theta_{gg}\left( {\tau,v} \right)} = {{\Theta_{GG}\left( {v,{- \tau}} \right)} = {{\exp\left( {- \frac{\tau^{2}}{2s_{t}^{2}}} \right)} \cdot {\exp\left( {- \frac{v^{2}}{2s_{f}^{2}}} \right)}}}},{{{with}\mspace{14mu} s_{t}s_{f}} = \frac{1}{2\pi}},{\text{where}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 313} \right\rbrack}$ ${s_{t}^{2} = {\sum\limits_{k}{k^{2}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}}},{s_{f}^{2} = {\sum\limits_{\ell}{\ell^{2}{{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}.}}}}$

For N,N′>>1, both the first and second arguments of θ_(gg) [⋅,⋅] should be relatively small, i.e., q^(→)=p^(→) so that

c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF314] has a large value; All of the terms with {right arrow over (q)}≠{right arrow over (p)}   [MF315] in (39) can be negligible. This property of Gaussian plays a central role in determining l_(μ) for maximizing

c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)).   [MF316]

Evaluating threefold summation of PCs with the cisoidal factor leads us to define a summation of IDFT-type

[MF 317] ${{F_{m^{\prime},N^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X\left\lbrack m^{\prime} \right\rbrack} \right\rbrack}_{m^{\prime}}(a)_{m^{\prime}}} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}\;{{X\left\lbrack m^{\prime} \right\rbrack}{e^{i\; 2\pi\frac{a\; m^{i}}{L}}.}}}}$ symbolically denoted by a pair of the square bracket F _(m′,N′) ^(−1,d)[⋅]_(m′)   [MF318] and the round bracket (a)_(m′) with its convenient notation (a)_(m′)=W^(−am), and that of DFT-type

[MF 319] ${{{\mathcal{F}_{m,N}^{d}\left\lbrack {x\lbrack m\rbrack} \right\rbrack}_{m}\left( b^{\prime} \right)_{m}} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N}}{\sum\limits_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{{x\lbrack m\rbrack}e^{{- i}\; 2\pi\frac{m\; b^{\prime}}{L}}}}}},$ symbolically denoted by a pair of convenient notations F _(m,N) ^(d)[⋅]_(m):(b′)_(m) =W ^(mb′)   [MF320] Using the notations: ν₀[l _(μ)]=l _(μ) −l _(D);τ₀[{circumflex over (k)} _(d)]={circumflex over (k)} _(d) −k _(d)   [MF321] one can obtain Lemma 2: If the receiver of type-3 has its address {right arrow over (p)}={right arrow over (q)}   [MF322] and Y=X, Y′=X′, then its CCF becomes

⁢[ MF ⁢ ⁢ 323 ] c p ′ , p → ( 3 ) ⁡ ( ℓ μ ; k ^ d ) ≃ Ae ⁢ W - τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] ⁢ℓ c PP ′ ⁢ d p → ⁢ X ρ ′ ⁢ W ( M ⁢ ⁢ N ⁢ ⁢ pv 0 ⁡ [ ℓ μ ] - ⁢ ⁢ ( N ′ ⁢ p ′ + ρ ′ 2 ) ⁢ M ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] + k d ⁢ ℓ μ - k ^ d ⁢ ℓ D 2 ) × ⁢ ⁢ ℱ m ′ , N ′ - 1 , d [ ⁢ X m ′ ′ ⁢ exp ( - ( v 0 ⁡ [ ℓ μ ] + ( ρ ′ - m ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ) 2 2 ⁢ s f 2 ) ⁢ℱ m , N d ⁡ [ X m ⁢ ℱ n , N d [ X n * ⁢ × ⁢ exp ( - ⁢ ( τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] + ( n - m ) ⁢ M ) 2 2 ⁢ s t 2 ) ] n × ( x 3 ⁢ ( - m ′ ) ) n ] m ⁢ ( x 3 ⁡ ( ρ ′ ) ) m ] m ′ ⁢ ( M ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k ^ d ] 2 ) m ′ , x 3 ⁡ ( ρ ′ ) = M ⁡ ( v 0 ⁡ [ ℓ μ ] + ρ ′ ⁢ M ′ ) 2 . ( 41 )

Thus one can know necessary conditions for

c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF324] to have a large value are |ν₀[l _(μ)]|<3s _(r) and |τ₀[{circumflex over (k)} _(d)]|<3s _(t)   [MF325] Proof. Using the round bracket symbols in summations of IDFT-type and DFT-type, one can rearrange 5 components among 6 components in the second twiddle factor in (39)

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 326} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{W^{\frac{1}{2}{{nMv}_{0}{\lbrack\ell_{\mu}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}{nMM}^{\prime}}} = {W^{\frac{1}{2}{{nM}{({{v_{0}{\lbrack\ell_{\mu}\rbrack}} - {m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}})}}} = \left( {x_{3}\left( {- m^{\prime}} \right)} \right)_{n}}},} \\ {{{W^{\frac{1}{2}{{mMv}_{0}{\lbrack\ell_{\mu}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{\frac{1}{2}{mp}^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}}} = {W^{\frac{1}{2}{{mM}{({{v_{0}{\lbrack\ell_{\mu}\rbrack}} + {\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}})}}} = \left( {x_{3}\left( \rho^{\prime} \right)} \right)_{m}}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{d}\rbrack}}} = \left( \frac{M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m^{\prime}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (42) \end{matrix}$ and move its residue term W^(−1/2ρ′M′τ0[k∧d]) of the 6 components to the first twiddle factor in (39). The use of the separability of the AF of the Gaussian proves (41). Lemma 3: Suppose that in two hypotheses H′₀ and H′₁ in (35) N[l]   [MF327] is Gaussian. Then the CCF <<N,S _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾ >d,l<<1,   [MF328] where the angular brackets <⋅,⋅>_(d,l) denotes the IP in the space l ₂(

)   [MF329] of discrete-frequency FD functions.

Then one can define a CCF, called a type-4 correlator, between the received FD-CE Ae ^(iκ) W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _(l) _(D) _(,−k) _(d) ^(f,d)Ψ[l;X],   [MF330] i.e., the DFT of the signal component of the received CE in (28) ψ_(τ)[k]   [MF331] with factor Ae ^(iκ) W ^(k) ^(d) ^(f) ^(c)    [MF332] instead of the input CE Ψ_(w)[l;X]   [MF333] to the receiver, and the FD complex impulse response of a NB filter matched to the FD estimated template CE in (33) with address (ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF334] W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(ν) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(l,d)Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]|d _({right arrow over (F)}=1) ,X′→Y′,X _(ρ) →Y _(ρ)   [MF335] given as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 336} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{C_{p,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {{Ae}^{ik}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}} \times {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D_{t}} - k_{d}}^{f,d}{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack}\left( {W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D_{t} - k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {pNM}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{0,{{- \rho}\; M}}^{f,d}Y_{\rho}{U_{\rho}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell:Y^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}}}}} & (43) \end{matrix}$ This CCF has the form

⁢[ MF ⁢ ⁢ 337 ] C p , p → ( 4 ) ⁡ ( k σ ; ℓ ^ D ) = Ae ⁢ W - τ 0 ⁢ PP ′ ⁢ ∑ q → ⁢⁢d q → ⁢ Y ρ * N ′ ⁢ N ⁢ ∑ m = 0 , m ′ = 0 , n ′ = 0 N - 1 , N ′ - 1 , N ′ - 1 ⁢ X m ⁢ X m ′ ⁢ Y n ′ ′ , * × Θ GG ⁡ [ ( ℓ ^ D - ℓ D ) + ( p ′ - q ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ⁢ N ′ + ( n ′ - m ′ ) ⁢ M ′ , ⁢ - ( k σ - k d ) - ( p - q ) ⁢ MN - ( ρ - m ) ⁢ M ] × W 1 2 ⁡ ( k d ⁢ ℓ ^ D - k σ ⁢ ℓ D + 2 ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ N ⁢ ⁢ q ⁢ ⁢ v 0 ⁡ [ ℓ ^ D ] - 2 ⁢ M ′ ⁢ N ′ ⁢ q ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k σ ] ) × W 1 2 ⁡ ( ( mn ′ - m ′ ⁢ ρ ) ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ M ′ - ( m ′ + n ′ ) ⁢ M ′ ⁢ τ 0 ⁡ [ k σ ] + ( m + ρ ) ⁢ M ⁢ ⁢ v 0 ⁡ [ ℓ ^ D ] ) ( 44 ) Similarly, for N,N′>>1, one can set {right arrow over (q)}={right arrow over (p)}   [MF338] so as to make

C′ _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF339] large; All of the terms in (44) with {right arrow over (q)}≠{right arrow over (p)}   [MF340] can be negligible. Then one can get the sum of the three exponents in the twiddle factor as above. Evaluating the threefold summation of PCs together with the cisoidal factor, one can have Lemma 4: If the receiver of type-4 has its address {right arrow over (p)}={right arrow over (q)}   [MF341] and Y=X, Y′=X′, then its CCF becomes

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 342} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{C_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma}:{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} \simeq {\frac{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{{- {\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}}\ell_{c}}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}X_{\rho}^{*}W^{({{{({N_{p} + \frac{\rho}{2}})}M\;{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} - {M^{\prime}N^{\prime}p^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} + \frac{{k_{d}{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} - {k_{\sigma}\ell_{D}}}{2}})} \times {\mathcal{F}_{m,N}^{d}\left\lbrack {X_{m}{\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {\rho - m} \right)M}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{t}^{2}}} \right)}\;{\mathcal{F}_{m^{\prime},N^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}\;{\mathcal{F}_{n^{\prime},N^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X_{n^{\prime}}^{\prime,*} \times {\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {n^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{f}^{2}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack}_{n^{\prime}} \times \left( {x_{4}\left( {- m} \right)} \right)_{n^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}_{m^{\prime}}\left( {x_{4}(\rho)} \right)_{m^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}_{m}\left( \frac{M\;{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m}}},{{x_{4}(\rho)} = {\frac{M^{\prime}\left( {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack} + {\rho\; M}} \right)}{2}.}}} & (45) \end{matrix}$ Thus we know necessary conditions for

C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{right arrow over (l)} _(D))   [MF343] to have a large value are |ν₀[{circumflex over (l)} _(D)]|<3s _(f) and |τ₀[k _(σ)]|<3s _(t)   [MF344] Proof. Similarly using the round bracket symbols in summations of IDFT-type and DFT-type, one can rearrange 5 components among 6 components in the second twiddle factor in (44)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 345} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}n^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{\frac{1}{2}n^{\prime}{mM}\; M^{\prime}}} = {W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}n^{\prime}{M^{\prime}{({{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}} - {mM}})}}} = \left( {x_{4}\left( {- m} \right)} \right)_{n^{\prime}}}},} \\ {{{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}{pM}\; M^{\prime}}} = {W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}{M^{\prime}{({{r_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}} + {\rho\; M}})}}} = \left( {x_{4}(\rho)} \right)_{m^{\prime}}}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{W^{\frac{1}{2}{mM}\;{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} = \left( \frac{M\;{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (46) \end{matrix}$ and move its residue term W^(1/2μMν0[l∧D]) of the 6 components to the first twiddle factor in (44). The use of the separability of the AF of the Gaussian proves (45).

Equations (41) and (45) show that correlator of type 3 c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF346] and the one of type 4 C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF347] are perfectly symmetrical in terms of k _(d) and l _(D)   [MF348] Interchanging the TD-PC and FD-PC in the pair of type 3 c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF349] and of type 4 C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D));   [MF350] called a complementary pair (CP) [27] gives other pair of type 1 c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF351] and of type 2 c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽²⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF352] called an original pair (OP) [24, 30], defined as follows.

[Original pair (OP) of TD and FD correlators]

Observe another decomposition of v[k;χ] and V[l;X]   [MF353] given as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 354} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{v\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N}}{\sum\limits_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{X_{m}\mathcal{T}_{{mM},0}^{d}{u_{m}^{(1)}\left\lbrack {k;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}\mathcal{T}_{{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}},0}^{f,d}{U_{m^{\prime}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (47) \end{matrix}$ whose TD-template of type-1 u _(m) ⁽¹⁾[k;X′]   [MF355] and FD-template of type-2 U _(m′) ⁽²⁾[l;X]   [MF356] are respectively defined by

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 357} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{u_{m}^{(1)}\left\lbrack {k;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}{X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}e^{i\;\pi\; m\; m^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}\Delta\; t\;\Delta\; f}\mathcal{T}_{0,{m^{\prime}\mathcal{M}^{\prime}}}^{d}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{0 \leq m \leq {N - 1}},} \\ {{{U_{m^{\prime}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N}}{\sum\limits_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{X_{m}e^{{- i}\;\pi\; m\; m^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}\Delta\; t\;\Delta\; f}\mathcal{T}_{0,{- {mM}}}^{f,d}{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {0 \leq m^{\prime} \leq {N^{\prime} - 1.}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (48) \end{matrix}$ First let ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾[k]   [MF358] be the (ρ,p^(→))-th estimated and received CE having the TD-template X _(ρ)μ_(ρ) ⁽¹⁾[k,X′]   [MF359] with address (ρ,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF360] of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

,   [MF361] defined by the TD-template CE of type 1 [MF362] ψ_(ρ,{circumflex over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾[k]=d _({right arrow over (p)}) ·T _(pNM·ρ′N′M′) ^(d) T _(ρM,0) ^(d) X _(ρ) u _(ρ) ⁽¹⁾[k,X′],  (49) Then one can get its associated CCF, called a type-1 correlator [MF363] c _(ρ,{circumflex over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾(l _(μ) :{circumflex over (k)} _(d))=<Ae ^(iκ) W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)ψ[k;X],W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) ×T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ_(ρ,{circumflex over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾[k:{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,l _(μ)]|d _(β)=1,X′→Y′,X _(ρ) →Y _(ρ) >d,k  (50) and one can have

     [MF 364]                                           (51) ${c_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}\left( {\ell_{\mu}:{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack}{Y_{\rho}^{*}\left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{{p\;{NM}},{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{{\rho\; M},0}^{d}{u_{\rho}^{(1)}\left\lbrack {k:Y^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}} \right)}^{*}}}} = {{Ae}^{j\;\kappa}W^{{({k_{d} - {\hat{k}}_{d}})}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{\overset{\_}{q}\;}^{\;}{d_{\overset{\_}{q}}\frac{Y_{\rho}^{*}}{N^{\prime}\sqrt{N}}{\sum\limits_{m,m^{\prime},n^{\prime}}^{{N - 1},{N^{\prime} - 1},{N^{\prime} - 1}}{X_{m}X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}Y_{n^{\prime}}^{\prime,*} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{k_{d}\ell_{\mu}} - {{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{D}} + {2M\; N\; p\;{v_{0}\left\lbrack \ell_{\mu} \right\rbrack}} - {2M^{\prime}N^{\prime}p^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack}}} \right)} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{\left( {{m\; n^{\prime}} - {m^{\prime}\rho}} \right)M\; M^{\prime}} - {\left( {m^{\prime} + n^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack}} + {\left( {m + \rho} \right)M\;{v_{0}\left\lbrack \ell_{\mu} \right\rbrack}}} \right)} \times {{\theta_{z\; z}\left\lbrack {{{\left( {p - q} \right)M\; N} + {\hat{k}}_{d} - k_{d} + {\left( {\rho - m} \right)M}},{{\left( {p^{\prime} - q^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}N^{\prime}} + \ell_{\mu} - \ell_{D} + {\left( {n^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}}} \right\rbrack}.}}}}}}}$ Let Y=X, Y′=X′ and discard all the terms d _({right arrow over (q)})   [MF365] except the term satisfying {right arrow over (q)}={right arrow over (p)}.   [MF366]

Then one can have

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 367} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {c_{\rho,\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}^{(1)}\left( {{{\ell_{\mu}{\text{:}{\hat{k_{d}}\text{)}}}}❘{\simeq {\frac{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}{W^{- \tau_{0}}}^{\;_{{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}\ell_{c}}}d_{\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}X_{p}^{*}W\mspace{115mu}\left( {{\left( {N_{p} + \frac{\rho}{2}} \right){M_{v_{0}}\left\lbrack \ell_{\mu} \right\rbrack}} - {M^{\prime}N^{\prime}p^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack}} + \frac{{k_{d}\ell_{\mu}} - {{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{D}}}{2}} \right) \times \mspace{326mu}{\mathcal{F}_{m,N}^{d}\left\lbrack {X_{m}{\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {\rho - m} \right)M}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{t}^{2}}} \right)}{\mathcal{F}_{m^{\prime},N^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X_{m^{\prime}}^{\prime}{\mathcal{F}_{n^{\prime},N^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X_{n^{\prime}}^{\prime,*} \times {\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{v_{0}\left\lbrack \ell_{\mu} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {n^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{f}^{2}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack}_{n^{\prime}}\left( {x_{1}\left( {- m} \right)} \right)_{n^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}_{m^{\prime}} \times \left( {x_{1}(\rho)} \right)_{m^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}_{m}\left( \frac{{Mv}_{0}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}{2} \right)_{2}}}},{{x_{1}(\rho)} = \frac{M^{\prime}\left( {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack} + {\rho\; M}} \right)}{2}},} \right.} & (52) \end{matrix}$

in which using the round bracket symbols in summations of IDFT-type and DFT-type, one can rearrange 5 components among 6 components in the second twiddle factor in (51)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 368} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}n^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{\frac{1}{2}n^{\prime}{mMM}^{\prime}}} = {W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}n^{\prime}{M^{\prime}{({{\tau_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}} - {mM}})}}} = \left( {x_{1}\left( {- m} \right)} \right)_{n^{\prime}}}},} \\ {{{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}M^{\prime}p\; M}} = {W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}{M^{\prime}{({{\tau_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}} + {\rho\; M}})}}} = \left( {x_{1}(\rho)} \right)_{m^{\prime}}}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{W^{\frac{1}{2}{mM}\;{\tau_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{k}}_{d}\rbrack}}} = \left( \frac{M\;{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{k}}_{d} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (53) \end{matrix}$ and move its residue term W^(1/2ρMτ0[k∧d]) of the 6 components to the first twiddle factor in (51). The use of the separability of the AF of the Gaussian gives (52).

Secondly let Ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽²⁾[l]   [MF369] be the (ρ,p^(→)) th estimated and received CE having the FD-template X′ _(ρ′) U _(ρ′) ⁽²⁾[l,X]   [MF370] with address (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})   [MF371] of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

,   [MF372] defined by the FD-template CD of type 2 [MF373] Ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽²⁾[l]=d _({right arrow over (p)}) T _(ρ′N′M′, . . . pNM) ^(l,d) T _(0, . . . ρM) ^(l,d) X′ _(ρ′) U _(ρ′) ⁽²⁾[l,X],  (54) Then one can get its associated FD correlator, called a type-2 correlator

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 374} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}^{(2)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {< {{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D},{- k_{d}}}^{f,d}{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack}}}},{{W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}} \times \mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}^{(2)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}❘_{{{d\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}} = 1},{X\rightarrow Y},{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}\rightarrow{Y_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime} > \ell}},d}}} & (55) \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{and}\mspace{14mu}{have}}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 375} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}^{(2)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{{({k_{d} - k_{\sigma}})}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{d}}}^{f,d}{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack}{{Y_{\rho}^{i*}\left( {{\mathcal{T}_{\hat{\ell}}}_{D,{- k_{\sigma}}}^{\ell,d}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},\;{{- p}\;{NM}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{{{- \rho^{\prime}}M^{\prime}},0}^{f,d}{U_{\rho^{\prime}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {\ell:Y} \right\rbrack}} \right)}^{*} \cdot}}}} = {{Ae}^{j\;\kappa}W^{{({k_{d} - k_{\sigma}})}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{\overset{\_}{q}\;}{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\frac{Y_{\rho^{\prime}}^{i,*}}{N\sqrt{N^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m,m^{\prime},{n = 0}}^{{N - 1},{N^{\prime} - 1},{N - 1}}{X_{m}X_{m}^{\prime}}}}}}}},{Y_{n}^{*} \times {\Theta_{ZZ}\left\lbrack {{{\left( {p^{\prime} - q^{\prime}} \right)M\; N} + {\hat{\ell}}_{D} - \ell_{D} + {\left( {n^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}},{{{- \left( {p - q} \right)}{MN}} - \left( {k_{\sigma} - k_{d}} \right) - {\left( {n - m} \right)M}}} \right\rbrack} \times W^{\frac{1}{2}{({{k_{d}{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} - {k_{\sigma}\ell_{D}} + {2M\; N\; q\;{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} - {2M^{\prime}N^{\prime}q^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}}})}} \times \mspace{256mu}{W^{\frac{1}{2}{({{{({{m\;\rho^{\prime}} - {m^{\prime}n}})}M\; M^{\prime}} - {{({m^{\prime} + \rho^{\prime}})}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} + {{({m + n})}M\;{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}}})}}.}}} & (56) \end{matrix}$ Let Y=X, Y′=X′ and discard all the terms d _(ij)   [MF376] except the term satisfying {right arrow over (q)}={right arrow over (p)}.   [MF377]

Then one can have

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\{ {{MF}\; 378} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightharpoonup}{p}}^{(2)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} \simeq {\frac{{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{t,*}W^{({{M\; N\; p\;{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} - {{({{N^{\prime}p^{\prime}} + \frac{\rho^{\prime}}{2}})}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} + \frac{{k_{d}{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} - {k_{\sigma}\ell_{D}}}{2}})} \times {\mathcal{F}_{m^{\prime},\mathcal{N}^{\prime}}^{{- 1},d}\left\lbrack {X_{m}^{\prime},{{\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {\rho^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{f}^{2}}} \right)}{\mathcal{F}_{m,N}^{d}\left\lbrack {X_{m}{\mathcal{F}_{n,N}^{d}\left\lbrack {X_{n}^{*} \times {\exp\left( {- \frac{\left( {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack} + {\left( {n - m} \right)M}} \right)^{2}}{2s_{t}^{2}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack}_{n}\left( {x_{2}\left( {- m^{\prime}} \right)} \right)_{n}} \right\rbrack}_{m} \times \left( {x_{2}\left( \rho^{\prime} \right)} \right)_{m}}} \right\rbrack}_{m^{\prime}}\left( \frac{M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m^{\prime}}}},{{x_{2}\left( \rho^{\prime} \right)} = \frac{M\left( {{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack} + {\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}} \right.}{2}},} & (57) \end{matrix}$ in which using the round bracket symbols in summations of IDFT-type and DFT-type, one can rearrange 5 components among 6 components in the second twiddle factor in (56)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 379} \right\rbrack\mspace{464mu}} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{W^{\frac{1}{2}{{nMv}_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}n\; m^{\prime}{MM}^{\prime}}} = {W^{\frac{1}{2}{{nM}{({{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}} - {m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}})}}} = \left( {x_{2}\left( {- m^{\prime}} \right)} \right)_{n}}},} \\ {{{W^{\frac{1}{2}{{mMv}_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}}} \cdot W^{\frac{1}{2}{mM}\;\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}} = {W^{\frac{1}{2}{{mM}{({{v_{0}{\lbrack{\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rbrack}} + {\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}})}}} = \left( {x_{2}\left( \rho^{\prime} \right)} \right)_{m}}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{W^{{- \frac{1}{2}}m^{\prime}M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}} = \left( \frac{M^{\prime}{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack}}{2} \right)_{m^{\prime}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (58) \end{matrix}$ and move its residue term W^(−1/2ρ′M′τT0[k∧d]) of the 6 components to the first twiddle factor in (56). The use of the separability of the AF of the Gaussian gives (57).

<6.2 Phase-Updating Loop and von Neumann's Alternative Projection Theorem>

If one can get precise estimates {circumflex over (k)} _(d) and {circumflex over (l)} _(D)   [MF380] that make all |ν₀[l _(μ)]|,|τ₀[{right arrow over (k)} _(d)]|   [MF381] in Lemma 2 and |ν₀[{circumflex over (l)} _(D)]|,|τ₀[k _(σ)]|   [MF382] in Lemma 4 are within chip-pulse bandwidth and duration, then the two CCFs c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)) and C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF383] will filter out the interference <ψ_(η,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k],ψ_(,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]>d,k and <Ψ_(η,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l],Ψ_(,ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]>d,l   [MF384] respectively contained in c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)), and C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF385] and recover d _(p)    [MF386] in place of using conventional sharp filters. This is a radical solution to the digital signal processing for communication. The simple way to update estimates {circumflex over (k)} _(d) and {circumflex over (l)} _(D)   [MF387] in both pairs of correlators is the following algorithm, called a Phase-Updating Loop (PUL), different from a conventional “Phase-Locked Loop” for synchronisation in communication systems:

[PUL algorithm with updating rule for attenuation factor-MLE]:

Let {c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d,s))}_(ρ′=0) ^(N′−1)   [MF388] and {C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s))}_(ρ=0) ^(N−1)   [MF389] be the CP of the type-3 and type-4 correlator arrays, and let {c _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d,s))}_(ρ=0) ^(N′−1)   [MF390] and {C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽²⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s))}_(ρ′=0) ^(N′−1)   [MF391] be the OP of the type-1 and type-2 correlator arrays. For simplicity set d _({right arrow over (p)})=1   [MF392] until the PUL algorithm is terminated. Let A({circumflex over (θ)}_(s) ^(t,d))e ^(iκ({circumflex over (θ)}) ^(c) ^(t,d) )   [MF393] be the s-th MLE of the attenuation factor A({circumflex over (θ)}^(t,d))e ^(in(θ) ^(t,d) ⁾   [MF394] with the s-th digitized estimate {circumflex over (θ)}_(s) ^(t,d)=({circumflex over (k)} _(d,s) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s+1)) or ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,s+1) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s))   [MF395] of the parameter θ′=(t_(d), f_(D)) that is defined in (16), where ψ^(x)(t−t ^(d))e ^(−i2πf) ^(D) ^((t−t) ^(d) ⁾,ψ_(w)(t)   [MF396] are replaced by (T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d:o:) _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D:o) ^(d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k])*,T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d,o:) {circumflex over (l)} _(D,o) ^(d)ψ[k],   [MF397] respectively, given as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}398} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{\left. {\hat{A(}\theta_{s}^{\prime,d}} \right)e^{i{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}} = {\frac{\sum_{k = 0}^{N_{T} - 1}{\left( {{??}_{{\hat{k}}_{d,s},{\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}}^{d}{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}} \right)^{*}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d,s},{\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}}^{d}{\psi\lbrack k\rbrack}}}{\sum_{k = 0}^{N_{T} - 1}{{\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d,s},{\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}}^{d}{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack}}}^{2}}.}} & (59) \end{matrix}$ Then one can update an integer pair ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,s) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s+1))(resp.({circumflex over (k)} _(d,s+1) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,s)))   [MF399] as l^(∧) _(D,s+1)=l*_(μ), if s is even (resp. odd), and k^(∧) _(d,s)+i=k*_(σ), if s is odd (resp. even), where

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF400}\rbrack} & \; \\ {{\left. \mspace{79mu}\begin{matrix} {{\left( {\rho^{\prime,*},\ell_{\mu}^{*}} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu}}\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu},{\hat{k}}_{d,s}} \right)}}{\left. {X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}\hat{A(}\theta_{s}^{\prime,d}} \right)e^{i{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}},} \\ {{\left( {\rho^{*},k_{\sigma}^{*}} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho,k_{\sigma}}\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{C_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma},{\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}} \right)}}{\left. {X_{\rho}\hat{A(}\theta_{s}^{\prime,d}} \right)e^{i{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{14mu}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{CP}},} & (60) \\ {{\left. \begin{matrix} {{\left( {\rho^{*},\ell_{\mu}^{*}} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho,\ell_{\mu}}\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{c_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}\left( {\ell_{\mu},{\hat{k}}_{d,s}} \right)}}{\left. {X_{\rho}\hat{A(}\theta_{s}^{\prime,d}} \right)e^{i{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}},} \\ {{\left( {{\rho^{\prime}}^{,*},k_{\sigma}^{*}} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho^{\prime},k_{\sigma}}\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}\left( {k_{\sigma},{\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}} \right)}}{\left. {{X^{\prime}}_{\rho^{\prime}}\hat{A(}\theta_{s}^{\prime,d}} \right)e^{i{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{14mu}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{OP}},} & (61) \end{matrix}$ and the initial value θ₀ ^(t,d)=({circumflex over (k)} _(d,0) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,1)) or ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,1) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,0))   [MF401] is chosen arbitrarily, e.g., θ₀ ^(t,d)=(0,0).   [MF402] Select l* _(μ)and k* _(σ)   [MF403] to be candidates of {circumflex over (l)} _(D,s+1) and {circumflex over (k)} _(d,s+1)   [MF404] The (s+1)-th step estimation procedure is terminated if, for the chip pulse g[k] (or G[1]) duration LΔt and bandwidth LΔf,

[MF 405] ${{{\hat{k}}_{d,{s + 2}} - {\hat{k}}_{d,s}}} \leq {\frac{L}{2}\mspace{14mu}{and}\mspace{14mu}{{{\hat{\ell}}_{D,{s + 2}} - {\hat{\ell}}_{D,s}}}} \leq {\frac{L}{2}.}$ Then such estimates are ML estimates and both of the two correlators become ML receivers. This algorithm can be written in the form of Youla's restoration [22] of a signal as given in Theorem below.

The recovery or restoration of a signal that has been distorted is one of the most important problems in signal processing. Youla [22] gave the answers to the restoration problems. Adroit use [23] of some of the mathematical machinery, introduced by Youla [22] will lead us to show that the convergence of the PUL algorithm hinges on how well the von Neumann's APT [21] does work.

Consider the Hilbert Space

   [MF406] consisting of all l²(Z) space of square-summable continuous and discrete-time (or discrete-frequency) functions with an IP, defined by

[MF 407] $\left\langle {f,g} \right\rangle_{d,k} = {\sum\limits_{k = {- \infty}}^{\infty}\;{{f\lbrack k\rbrack}{g^{*}\lbrack k\rbrack}}}$ $\left( {{{{{or}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 408} \right\rbrack}\left\langle {F,G} \right\rangle_{d,\ell}} = {\sum\limits_{\ell = {- \infty}}^{\infty}{{F\lbrack{\mathcal{k}}\rbrack}{G^{*}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}},{{F\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {\mathcal{F}\left\lbrack {f\lbrack k\rbrack} \right\rbrack}},{{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {\mathcal{F}\left\lbrack {g\lbrack k\rbrack} \right\rbrack}}} \right)$ and the norm ∥f∥=√{square root over (<f,f> _(d,k))}   [MF409] or ∥F∥=√{square root over (<F,F> _(d,l))}.   [MF410] Let ε be any closed linear manifold (CLM) in the Hilbert space

   [MF411] The projection theorem [22] tells us that if ε′ and ε″ are orthogonal sub-spaces of

   [MF412] then every f∈ε possesses a unique decomposition f=g+h, g∈ε′, h∈ε″, where g, h are projections of f onto ε′ and ε″, respectively, denoted by g=Pf, h=Qf; P denotes the associated projection operator (PO) projecting onto ε′, Q=I−P its associated PO projecting onto ε″, and I the identity operator.

Let ε₁ (resp. ε₃) be the set of all f∈l ₂(

)   [MF413] that are LΔt-TL (resp. T_(S)-TL) signals. On the contrary, denote the set of all f∈l ₂(

)   [MF414] that are LΔf-BL signals by ε₂ and that of F_(S)-BL signals by ε₄. Each of ε_(i),1≤i≤4   [MF415] is a CLM [22].

Let P_(i) be a PO projecting onto ε_(i),1≤i≤4.   [MF416] and Q_(i)=I−P_(i) the PO projecting onto the orthogonal complement of ε_(i), written as ⊥ε_(i),1≤i≤4,   [MF417] each of which is defined below. The CCF plays a role of a PO in the sense that given any two signals r and s, the signal rϵε has a unique decomposition of the form

[MF 418] ${r = {{\frac{\left\langle {r,s} \right\rangle_{t}}{{s}^{2}}s} + s^{\bot}}},{s \in ɛ^{\prime}},$ where s ^(⊥)   [MF419] is orthogonal to s. The coefficient

[MF 420] $\frac{\left\langle {r,s} \right\rangle_{t}}{{s}^{2}}$ is regarded as a PO projecting onto ε′.

The CP of type-3, type-4 correlators and the OP of type-1, type-2 correlators provide also POs written as:

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF421}\rbrack} & \; \\ {{\left. \begin{matrix} {{\psi = {{P_{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}}\psi\;\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}} + \psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(3)}\bot}}},{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)} \in ɛ_{3}},{{P_{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}}\psi} = \frac{\left\langle {\psi,\;{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu},{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}} \right\rangle_{d,k}}{{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}}^{2}}},} \\ {{\Psi = {{P_{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}}\Psi\;\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}} + \Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(4)}\bot}}},{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)} \in ɛ_{4}},{{P_{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}}\Psi} = \frac{\left\langle {\Psi\;,{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma},{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}} \right\rangle_{d,\ell}}{{\Psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}}^{2}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{CP}},} & (62) \\ {{\left. \begin{matrix} {{\psi = {{P_{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}}\psi\;\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}} + \psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(1)}\bot}}},{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)} \in ɛ_{1}},{{P_{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}}\psi} = \frac{\left\langle {\psi,\;{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}\left( {\ell_{\mu},{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}} \right\rangle_{d,k}}{{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}}^{2}}},} \\ {{\Psi = {{P_{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}}\Psi\;\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}} + \Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(2)}\bot}}},{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)} \in ɛ_{2}},{{P_{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}}\Psi} = \frac{\left\langle {\Psi\;,{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}\left( {k_{\sigma},{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}} \right\rangle_{d,\ell}}{{\Psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}}^{2}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{OP}},} & (63) \end{matrix}$ where ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^((1)⊥),Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^((2)⊥),ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^((3)⊥),Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ^((4)⊥)   [MF422] are orthogonal complements of ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽¹⁾,Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽²⁾,ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾,Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾   [MF423]

The Alternative Projection Theorem (APT) [21, p. 55, theorem 13.7] (FIG. 11) tells us that:

If E and F are projections on CLMs ε,F   [MF424] in a Hilbert space, respectively, then the sequence of operators E, FE, EFE, FEFE, . . . has a limit G, the sequence F, EF, FEF, . . . has the same limit G, and G is a projection on εF.   [MF425] (The condition EF=FE need not hold.) With use of APT, the following result is obtained: Theorem:Convergence of Phase Updating Loop (PUL) (see FIG. 3c ): Let us consider the 4 POs in the TD and FD that contain (s+1)-step estimates (ρ′,*,l* _(μ))(resp.(ρ*,l* _(μ))).   [MF426] determined by the argmax-operations in terms of (p′,l_(μ)) (resp. (ρ,l_(μ)) with the s-step estimate {circumflex over (k)} _(ds)   [MF427] in (60) (resp. (61)), and (ρ*,k*_(σ)) (resp. (ρ′,*,k*_(σ))), determined by the argmax-operations in terms of (ρ,k_(σ)) (resp. (ρ′,k_(σ))) with the s-step estimate {circumflex over (l)} _(Ds)   [MF428] in (60) (resp. (61)). Write these POs symbolically as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF429}\rbrack} & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{P_{3} = {P_{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}}\left( {\rho^{\prime},{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d,s}}} \right)}},{P_{4} = {{P_{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}}\left( {\rho,{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{Ds}}} \right)}\mspace{14mu}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{CP}}},} \\ {{P_{1} = {P_{\psi_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(1)}}\left( {\rho,{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d,s}}} \right)}},{P_{2} = {{P_{\psi_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(2)}}\left( {\rho^{\prime},{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{Ds}}} \right)}\mspace{14mu}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{OP}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{14mu}{and}} & (64) \\ {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF430}\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{Q_{k} = {I - P_{k}}},{1 \leq k \leq 4.}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Then the PUL algorithm converges.

[Proof]: Consider the recursion formula for the CP only because that for the OP is exactly the same except an exchange between the TD-PC X and FD-PC X′, i.e., between suffixes (3, 4) and (1, 2). Two different orderings of the time-truncation operator P₃ and the band-limited operator P₄ provide two different iteration equations;

First consider an algorithm for the recovery of ψ   [MF431] as follows: If ψϵε₄,   [MF432] then ψ=F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)ψ   [MF433] and g ₁ =P ₃ ψ=P _(s) F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d) ψ=ψ−Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)ψ.   [MF434] Thus ψ   [MF435] satisfies the operator equation A ₁ ψ=g ₁ ,A ₁ =I−Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)   [MF436] The recursion, defined by ψ=g ₁ +Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)ψ   [MF437] enables us to have the iterative equation in the TD [22, 23] ψ_(i)=(I−Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d))ψ+Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ ,F ^(d)ψ_(i−1), or ψ_(i)−ψ=(Q ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d))^(i)(ψ₀−ψ), if(ψ₀−ψ)ϵε₄   [MF438] By the APT,

[MF 439] $\lim\limits_{i\rightarrow\infty}{\left( {Q_{3}\mathcal{F}^{{- 1},d}P_{4}\mathcal{F}^{d}} \right)^{i}\left( {\psi_{0} - \psi} \right)}$ becomes the projection of (ψ₀−ψ)   [MF440] onto a CLM ε_(c)=⊥ε₃∩ε₄. The ε_(c) contains only the trivial function [22, p. 699], [23, p. 637]; i.e.,

[MF 441] ${\lim\limits_{i\rightarrow\infty}\psi_{i}} = {\psi.}$ This is one of Youla's [22] main results. Hence the operator P ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)   [MF442] singles out the rectangle of chip-pulse duration LΔt and chip bandwidth LΔf with chip-level and data-level addresses ((ρ,ρ′),{right arrow over (p)}),   [MF443] i.e., the intersection of the rectangular support of its associated CE ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾   [MF444] and that of the CE Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)})) ⁽⁴⁾   [MF445] i.e., [((p+1)N+ρ−Δa′)T _(c):((p−1)N+ρ+Δb′)T _(c)]× [((p′+1)N′+ρ′−Δa)F _(c),((p′−1)N′+ρ′+Δb)F _(c)]   [MF446] of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

   [MF447] and filters out the rest in the TFP, where Δa′, Δb′, Δa, and Δb are integers satisfying Δa′+Δb′=M′ and Δa+Δb=M. Such an operator is referred to as a phase-space (or time-frequency) localization operator [7]. Thus the CE ψ [k] is restored so that the parameters k _(d) and l _(D)   [MF448] are estimated within LΔt and LΔf. It should be noted that unlike usual rectangles of strictly TL (resp. BL) operator [23], the time-truncation operator P₃ (resp. the band-limited operator P₄) is defined by using a template, i.e., a non-overlapped superposition of N coded TD Gaussian chip-pulses g[k] (resp. N′ coded FD Gaussian chip-pulses G[l])   [MF449] with no guard interval.

Conversely, in the FD, if ψϵε₃, then Ψ=F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)Ψ   [MF450] and g ₂ =P ₄ Ψ=P ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ ,F ^(−1,d) Ψ=Ψ−Q ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)Ψ   [MF451]

That is, ψ satisfies the operator equation [23] A ₂ Ψ=g ₂ ,A ₂ =I−Q ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)   [MF452] This gives the iterative equation [MF453] Ψ_(i)=(I−Q ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d))Ψ+Q ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)Ψ_(i−1); or Ψ_(i)−Ψ=(Q ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d))^(i)(Ψ₀−Ψ), if (Ψ₀−Ψ)ϵε₃  (66) By the APT,

[MF 454] $\lim\limits_{i\rightarrow\infty}{\left( {Q_{4}\mathcal{F}^{d}P_{3}\mathcal{F}^{{- 1},d}} \right)^{i}\left( {\Psi_{0} - \Psi} \right)}$ becomes the projection of (ψ₀−ψ) onto a CLM ε′_(c)=⊥ε₄∩ε₃   [MF455] This CLM contains only the trivial function. Thus lim_(i→∞)ψ_(i)=ψ.

The FD CE Ψ[l]   [MF456] is restored so that the parameters k _(d) and l _(D)   [MF457] are estimated within LΔt and LΔf. Similarly, the operator P ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)   [MF458] i.e., another localization operator singles out the rectangle of LΔt×LΔf with chip-level and data-level addresses ((ρ,ρ′),{right arrow over (p)})   [MF459] i.e., the intersection of the rectangular support of the CE ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾   [MF460] and that of the CE Ψ_(ρ,{umlaut over (p)}′) ⁽⁴⁾   [MF461] [((p+1)N+ρ−Δa′)T _(c),((p−1)N+ρ+Δb′)T _(c)]× [((p′−1)N′+ρ′−Δa)F _(c),((p′−1)N′+ρ′+Δb)T _(c)]   [MF462] of the lattice T _(c)

×F _(c)

   [MF463] and filters out the rest in the TFP. [End of proof]

7. Twinned Filter Bank Multi-Carrier System

<7.1 Transmitters for Generating Signature and Radar Signal>

Consider a multi-carrier filter bank for generating the TD-signature v[k;χ] and FD-signature V[l;X],   [MF464] defined in (25). Using a repetition of the TD-PC X_(m) of period N to get an infinite code sequence at the time: −∞, . . . , −T_(c), 0, T_(c), . . . , ∞ and that of the FD-PC X′_(m′) of period N′ to get an infinite code sequence at the frequency: −∞, . . . , —F_(c), 0, F_(c), . . . , ∞, one can get: Proposition 6: Write V[k;χ] and   [MF465] in (25) respectively as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF466}\rbrack} & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{NN}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m^{\prime} = 0}^{N^{\prime} - 1}\;{{X^{\prime}}_{m^{\prime}}{\sum\limits_{m \in {\mathbb{Z}}}\;{X_{m}{{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{TD}\left\lbrack {k - {m\; M}} \right\rbrack}}}}}}},} \\ {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{NN}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{m = 0}^{N - 1}{X_{m}{\sum\limits_{m^{\prime} \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{FD}\left\lbrack {\ell - {m^{\prime}\; M^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}\mspace{14mu}{where}} & (67) \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack},\ {{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}} & \lbrack{MF467}\rbrack \end{matrix}$ are modulated filters, defined by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF468}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack} = {{{g\lbrack k\rbrack}W^{{- m^{\prime}}{M^{\prime}{({k + \frac{mM}{3}})}}}} = {{g\lbrack k\rbrack}{W^{{- m^{\prime}}M^{\prime_{k}}}\left( {- 1} \right)}^{{mm}^{\prime}}}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{f}}_{m,m^{\prime}}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {{{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}W^{{mM}{({\ell + \frac{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}{2}})}}} = {{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}{{W^{mM\ell}\left( {- 1} \right)}^{{mm}^{\prime}}.}}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (68) \end{matrix}$ For an input x[k] and output y[n], Vaidyanathan [13, p 117] defined the input-output relation in the TD using three types of multi-rate filters with filter coefficient h[⋅]: M_(f)-fold decimation filter

[MF 469] ${{y\lbrack n\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}\;{{x\lbrack k\rbrack}{h\left\lbrack {{nM}_{f} - k} \right\rbrack}}}},$ L_(f)-fold interpolation filter

${{y\lbrack n\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}\;{{x\lbrack k\rbrack}{h\left\lbrack {n - {kL}_{f}} \right\rbrack}}}},$ and M_(f)/L_(f)-fold decimation filter

[MF 471] ${y\lbrack n\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{x\lbrack k\rbrack}{{h\left\lbrack {{nM}_{f} - {kL}_{f}} \right\rbrack}.}}}$

[Proof]: The TD-signature ν[k;χ] in (25) (resp. the FD-signature V[l,X]   [MF472] ) looks like the expression of a signal obtained at the output of a synthesis filter bank (SFB) [10, 12] with N′(resp. N) sub-bands and with an expansion factor equal to M (resp. M′) and being phase-coded by the FD-PC X′_(m′) (resp. the TD-PC X_(m)) on each sub-band. Indeed, if the X _(m) ,mϵ

(resp. X′ _(m′) ,m′ϵ

)   [MF473] is the input signal and the f _(m,m′) ^(TD)[k](resp.f _(m,m′) ^(FD)[l])   [MF474] is the filter on the (m,m′)th sub-band of this SFB, then the output v[k;X](resp. V[l;X])   [MF475] can be written as (67). [End of proof]

Together with the symbols 1 cm[M,N′]=M₀N′=MN′₀, 1 cm[M′,N]=M′₀N=M′N₀ [13], [10], [11] using M₀N′,M′₀N polyphase component

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF476}\rbrack & \; \\ {{{E_{e}^{g}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{g\left\lbrack {e + {{kM}_{0}N^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}z^{- k}}}},{{E_{e}^{G}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{G\left\lbrack {e + {\ell\; M_{0}^{\prime}N}} \right\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}}}} & (69) \end{matrix}$ one can get polyphase filters (Vaidyanathan's [13, p 121] Type 1 polyphase)

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF477}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{F_{m\; m^{\prime}}^{TD}(z)} = {{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{M_{0}N^{\prime}} - 1}{{f_{m\; m^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack}z^{- k}}} = {\left( {- 1} \right)^{\;{m\; m^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{M_{0}N^{\prime}} - 1}{E_{e}^{g}\left( {zW}^{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}} \right)}}}}},} \\ {{{F_{m\; m^{\prime}}^{FD}(z)} = {{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{M_{0}N^{\prime}} - 1}{{f_{m\; m^{\prime}}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}} = {\left( {- 1} \right)^{\;{m\; m^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{M_{0}N^{\prime}} - 1}{E_{e}^{G}\left( {zW}^{- {mM}} \right)}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (70) \end{matrix}$ For 1_(m)=1 cm[M,N′], g_(d)=gcd[M,N′], there exist N′₀,M₀ satisfying 1_(m)=MN′₀=N′M₀. On the other hand, by the identity 1_(m)·g_(d)=M·N′, M=g_(d)·M₀,N′=g_(d)N′₀ hold.

Thus one can get the SFBs of 2-D modulated v[k] and V[l] by TD-,FD-PC as shown in FIGS. 4, 5, respectively.

FIG. 4 shows the SFB with TD-,FD-PCs X_(m),X′_(m′) for generating TD signature v[k] in (25), (67), containing m′-th TD template u _(m′) ^(TD)[k],0≤m′≤N′−1.   [MF478]

FIG. 5 shows the SFB with TD-,FD-PCs X_(m),X′_(m′) for generating FD signature V[l]   [MF479] in (25), (67), containing m-th FD template U _(m) ^(FD)[l],0≤m≤N−1.   [MF480]

While eq. (27) provides the SFBs for generating ψ[k;X]   [MF481] and Ψ[l;X].   [MF482]

Proposition 7: The CEs ψ[k;χ] and Ψ[l;X].   [MF483] can be written respectively as

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF484}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \cdot {k_{q,q^{\prime}}^{TD}\left\lbrack {k - {qNM}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \cdot {k_{q,q^{\prime}}^{FD}\left\lbrack {\ell - {q^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (71) \\ {\lbrack{MF485}\rbrack{{k_{q,q^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack},{k_{{q,q^{\prime}}\;}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ are modulated filters of their associated SFBs, defined by

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF486}\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{k_{q,q^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack} = {{{v\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack}W^{{- q^{\prime}}N^{\prime}{M^{\prime}{({k + \frac{qNM}{2}})}}}} = {{v\left\lbrack {k;\chi} \right\rbrack}{W^{{- q^{\prime}}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}k}\left( {- 1} \right)}^{q\; q^{\prime}N\; N^{\prime}}}}},} \\ {{k_{q,q^{\prime}}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack}W^{q\; N\;{M{({\ell + \frac{q^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}{2}})}}}} = {{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi} \right\rbrack}{{W^{{- q}\; N\; M\;\ell}\left( {- 1} \right)}^{q\; q^{\prime}N\; N^{\prime}}.}}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (72) \end{matrix}$ [Proof]: Equation (71) indicates that if {d _(q·q′)}_(q=0) ^(P−1)   [MF487] (resp. {d _(q·q′)}_(q′=0) ^(P′−1)   [MF488] denotes the input signal, and k _(q·q′) ^(TD)[k]   [MF489] (resp. k _(q·q′) ^(FD)[l])   [MF490] is the filter on the (q,q′) th sub-band of its associated SFB, then the TD-CE:ψ[k;X]   [MF491] (resp. FD-CE:Ψ[l;X])   [MF492] is the output of its SFB with PP′ sub-bands and with an expansion factor equal to NM (resp. N′M′) on each sub-band, [end of proof]

Thus one can obtain the SFB for generating a transmit signal, that contains data symbols as shown in FIGS. 6,7. Conventional SFBs do not involve the process of generating signature as shown in FIGS. 4,5. In FIGS. 6,7, the case where N=N′=1 corresponds to the usual SFBs. Using the following modulated filter (MF)s for data transmission, given by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF493}\rbrack & \; \\ {{{E_{e}^{v}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{v\left\lbrack {e + {{kM}_{0}N^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}z^{- k}}}},{{E_{e}^{V}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{V\left\lbrack {e + {\ell\; M_{0}^{\prime}N}} \right\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}}},} & (73) \end{matrix}$ one can obtain polyphase filters (Vaidyanathan's [13, p 121] Type 1 polyphase)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF494}\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{K_{{qq}^{\prime}}^{TD}(z)} = {{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{P_{0}^{\prime}M\; N} - 1}{{k_{{qq}^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack}z^{- k}}} = {\left( {- 1} \right)^{{qq}^{\prime}N\; N^{\prime}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{P_{0}^{\prime}M\; N} - 1}{E_{e}^{v}\left( {z\; W^{q^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}} \right)}}}}},} \\ {{{K_{{qq}^{\prime}}^{FD}(z)} = {{\sum\limits_{\ell = 0}^{{P_{0}M\; N} - 1}{{k_{{qq}^{\prime}}^{FD}\lbrack\ell\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}} = {\left( {- 1} \right)^{{qq}^{\prime}N\; N^{\prime}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{P_{0}M^{\prime}N^{\prime}} - 1}{E_{e}^{V}\left( {z\; W^{q\; N\; M}} \right)}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (74) \end{matrix}$ where P′₀,P₀ denote integers satisfying P′₀MN=1 cm[P′,MN], P₀MN=1 cm[P,MN]. [end of proof]

FIG. 6 shows the SFB for generating TD-complex envelope (CE) in (26) ψ[k]   [MF495] with input, complex-valued data {d _(p,p′)}_(p,p′=1) ^(P,P′)   [MF496]

FIG. 7 shows the SFB for generating FD-CE in (26) ψ[l]   [MF497] with input, complex-valued data {d _(p,p′)}_(p,p′=1) ^(P,P′)   [MF498] <7.2 AFB:Receivers and Encoder Design>

Besides the attenuation factors Ae^(1κ), the PD due to non-commutativity of modulation/demodulation by the carrier l_(c) operations, accompanied by the delay k^(∧) _(d), W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(f) ^(c)    [MF499]

arises. The received signal in (28) r[k;X,A,κ,θ ^(t,d)]   [MF500] (resp. its FT R[l;X,A,κ,θ ^(t,d)]),   [MF501] (simply denoted by r[k],R[l])   [MF502] contains those PDs.

Define a type-3 (resp. type-4) CCF between the received signal r[k](resp. R[1] in (28) and the estimated TD-template CE of type 3 in (29) W ^({circumflex over (k)}) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]|d _(β)=1   [MF503] (resp. FD-CE in (33) W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(c) T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(μ) ^(f,d)ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]|d _({right arrow over (p)})=1   [MF504] respectively by

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF505}\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(3)},r}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{r\lbrack k\rbrack}\left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{{pNM},{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{0,{p^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}{u_{\rho^{\prime}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {k;X} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}}}},{{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(4)},R}\left( {k_{\mu};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{R\lbrack\ell\rbrack}\left( {W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {pNM}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{0,{{- \rho}\; M}}^{f,d}X_{\rho}{U_{\rho}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{i}} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}}}},} & \; \end{matrix}$ where the phase factor W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF506] (resp. W ^(k) ^(σ) ^(l) ^(c) )   [MF507] is designed to cancel out the one W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF508] in the signal component of r[k] in (28), (38) (cf. c _(ρ′,{umlaut over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)))   [MF509] (resp. that of R[l])   [MF510] (cf. in (28),(43) C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))).   [MF511]

Then one can get a TD (resp. FD) analysis filter bank (AFB) [10, 12]:

Proposition 8: The CCFs of type-3 and of type-4 can be rewritten, suited to AFB realizations, respectively as

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF512}\rbrack} & \; \\ {{{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(3)},r}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{r\left\lbrack {k + {\hat{k}}_{d}} \right\rbrack}W^{{- {\hat{k}}_{d}}\ell_{c}}W^{\ell_{\mu}\lbrack{k - \frac{{pNM} - {\hat{k}}_{d}}{2}}\rbrack}{h_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {{pNM} - k + D} \right\rbrack}}}},} & (75) \\ {{{C_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(4)},R}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{R\left\lbrack {\ell + {\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right\rbrack}W^{{- k_{\sigma}}\ell_{c}}W^{- {k_{\sigma}\lbrack{\ell - \frac{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}} - {\hat{\ell}}_{D}}{2}}\rbrack}}{h_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}} - \ell} \right\rbrack}}}},} & (76) \end{matrix}$ where D=L−1 and h _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k],h_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]   [MF513] are modulated filters of TD and FD AFBs

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF514}\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{h_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\lbrack k\rbrack} = {X_{\rho\prime}^{\prime,*}{u_{\rho^{\prime}}^{{(3)},*}\left\lbrack {k;X} \right\rbrack}W^{{({{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}} + \rho^{\prime}})}{M^{\prime}({k - D - \frac{{p\; N\; M} - {\hat{k}}_{d}}{2}})}}}},} \\ {{h_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\lbrack\ell\rbrack} = {X_{\rho}^{*}{U_{\rho}^{{(4)},*}\left\lbrack {\ell;X^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}W^{{({{{- {({{p\; N} + \rho})}}M} - D})}\ell}{W^{{({{p\; N} + \rho})}M\;\frac{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}} + {\hat{\ell}}_{D}}{2}}.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (77) \end{matrix}$ (When P×P′

-ary symbols   [MF515] are transmitted,

one may evaluate the output at the address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′)   [MF516] in the correlator array of p-band, p′-duration to estimate {d _({right arrow over (p)})}_(p,p′=1) ^(P,P′.))   [MF517]

[Proof]: If the phase-modulated received TD signal

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF518}\rbrack & \; \\ {W^{{- {\hat{k}}_{d}}\ell_{c}}W^{\ell_{\mu}\lbrack{k - \frac{{pNM} - {\hat{k}}_{d}}{2}}\rbrack}{r\left\lbrack {k + {\hat{k}}_{d}} \right\rbrack}} & \; \end{matrix}$ (resp. the FD one

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF519}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. {W^{{- k_{\sigma}}\ell_{c}}W^{- {k_{\sigma}\lbrack{\ell - \frac{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}} - {\hat{\ell}}_{D}}{2}}\rbrack}}{R\left\lbrack {\ell + {\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right\rbrack}} \right) & \; \end{matrix}$ denotes the input signal of the (p′,{right arrow over (p)})-th   [MF520] (resp. (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)})-th   [MF521] -sub-band of the AFB with P′ (resp. P) sub-bands with a decimation factor equal to NM (resp. N′M′) on each sub-band, given by (75) (resp. (76)), then two facts:

-   i) one is the TD symmetry property [10] (cf. (21))     g(−t)=g(t),i.e.,g[k]=g[D−k],u _(ρ′) ⁽³⁾[;X]=u _(ρ′) ⁽³⁾[D−k;X]       [MF522]     and ii) the other is the property of the FD signal     G[−l]=W ^(−Dl) G[l],U _(ρ) ⁽⁴⁾[−l;X′]=W ^(−Dl) U _(ρ) ⁽⁴⁾[l;X′],       [MF523]     that the TD symmetry entails, prove that its associated filter     h _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k]   [MF524]     (resp.     h _(ρ,{umlaut over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l])   [MF525]     is defined by (77). [end of proof]     Note that two kinds of filters given in patent [2] contain neither     the PD W^(k_dl_c) nor its canceling-out terms W^(−k_dl_c),     W^(−k_σlc).

If AFB filter in (77) and P′₀MN, P₀M′N′ polyphase components:

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF526}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{R_{e}^{u_{s^{\prime}}}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{u_{s^{\prime}}^{TD}\left\lbrack {e + {k\; P_{0}^{\prime}M\; N}} \right\rbrack}z^{- k}}}},{1 \leq e \leq {P_{0}^{\prime}M\; N}},} \\ {{{R_{e^{\prime}}^{U_{s}}(z)} = {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{{U_{s}^{FD}\left\lbrack {e^{\prime} + {\ell\; P_{0}M^{\prime}N^{\prime}}} \right\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}}},{1 \leq e^{\prime} \leq {P_{0}M^{\prime}N^{\prime}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (78) \end{matrix}$ then one can obtain N′,N polyphase filters (Vaidyanathan's [13] Type 2 polyphase)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{20mu}\lbrack{MF527}\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{H_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p},s^{\prime}}^{TD}\left( {z;{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{P_{0}^{\prime}{MN}} - 1}{{h_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p},s^{\prime}}^{TD}\lbrack k\rbrack}z^{- k}}} =}} \\ {{\left( {- 1} \right)^{{pp}^{\prime}{NN}^{\prime}}W^{{({{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}} + s^{\prime}})}M^{\prime}\frac{{\hat{k}}_{d}}{2}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{P_{0}^{\prime}{MN}} - 1}{R_{e}^{u_{s^{\prime}}}\left( {zW}^{{({{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}} + s^{\prime}})}M^{\prime}} \right)}}},{1 \leq s^{\prime} \leq N^{\prime}}} \end{matrix} \\ \begin{matrix} {{H_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p},s}^{FD}\left( {z;{\hat{\ell}}_{d}} \right)} = {{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{{P_{0}M^{\prime}N^{\prime}} - 1}{{h_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p},s}^{FD}\lbrack k\rbrack}z^{- \ell}}} =}} \\ {{\left( {- 1} \right)^{{pp}^{\prime}{NN}^{\prime}}W^{{({{pN} + s})}M\frac{{\hat{\ell}}_{D}}{2}}{\sum\limits_{e = 0}^{{P_{0}M^{\prime}N^{\prime}} - 1}{R_{e^{\prime}}^{U_{s}}\left( {zW}^{{- {({{pN} + s})}}M} \right)}}},{1 \leq s \leq N}} \end{matrix} \end{matrix} \right\} & (79) \end{matrix}$ Thus one can get the AFBs as shown in FIGS. 8, 9. (The case where N=N′=1,N₀=N′₀=1 corresponds to the usual AFBs [12, 13].) The two CCFs (75) and (76) are FBMC-realizations of c⁽³⁾ _(ρ′,p→)(l_(μ);k_(d)),C⁽⁴⁾ _(ρ,p→)(k_(σ); l_(D)), respectively;

The output bipolar symbol of the TD-AFB (resp. the FD-AFB) is given as the sign of

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF528}\rbrack & \; \\ {\Re\frac{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(3)},r}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}}{\hat{A}e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ (resp. that of

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF529}\rbrack & \; \\ {\left. {\Re\frac{X_{\rho}{C_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(4)},R}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}}{\hat{A}e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}}} \right),} & \; \end{matrix}$ where Ae ^(i{circumflex over (κ)})   [MF530] is the MLE of the attenuation factor Ae^(iκ) with the MLE {circumflex over (θ)}^(t,d)=({circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF531] (cf. (59)). Such a pair of SFBs and AFBs symmetrical in the TD and FD is referred to as a “twinned-FBMC”.

FIG. 8 shows an AFB equipped with a TD-correlator array for decoding complex-valued data symbols {d _(p,p′)}_(p=1) ^(P),1≤p′≤P′,1≤p′≤P′,   [MF532]

FIG. 9 shows the AFB equipped with an FD-correlator array for decoding complex-valued data symbols {d _(p,p′)}_(p′=1) ^(P′),1≤p≤P,   [MF533] In which the TD-correlator c _({right arrow over (p)},s′) ^(TD)(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF534] and the FD-correlator C _({right arrow over (p)},s′) ^(FD)(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF535] in FIGS. 8 and 9 correspond respectively to c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d))   [MF536] and C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D)).   [MF537]

Note that if the PUL algorithm is implemented in the interface between the TD- and FD-AFBs, as shown in FIG. 10, then the resultant interface with time-varying or adaptive AFBs becomes a parameter estimator for a radar, and a synchroniser [3] for communication systems after the PUL algorithm converges. In addition, it also plays a role of an encoder of the transmitted

-ary symbol d _({right arrow over (p)})ϵ

   [MF538] for data communication on the basis of complex-valued CCFs

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF539}\rbrack & \; \\ {\frac{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(3)},r}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}}{\hat{A}e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}}{and}\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF540}\rbrack & \; \\ {\frac{X_{\rho}{C_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{{(4)},R}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}}{\hat{A}e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}}.} & \; \end{matrix}} & \; \end{matrix}$ All the filters, defined by (68), (72), and (77) in this FBMC can be realized by the polyphase filters (called Vaidyanathan's type 1 or type 2 polyphase[13]). But such subjects are beyond our present interest and so are omitted here.

FIGS. 10a and 10c show the AFBs with the TD-correlator array and the FD-correlator array, respectively, and FIG. 10b shows an illustration of an alternative updating process between MLEs of two arrays based on the von Neumann's APT.

8. Other Examples of Communication Exploiting the Non-Commutativity of Time and Frequency Shifts

In the radar detection technique as a typical example of communication exploiting the non-commutative property (NCP) of time and frequency shift (TFS)s, a pair of TFSO of type 3 with t_(d), f_(D) T _(t) _(d) _(,f) _(D)    [MF541] and TFSO of type 4 T _({circumflex over (t)}) _(d) _(,f) _(D)    [MF542] with estimated parameters {circumflex over (t)} _(d) ,{right arrow over (f)} _(D)   [MF543] at the receiver, has shown that a priori half shifts of t_(d), f_(D) play an important role in the estimation of those parameters. Other examples of communication systems exploiting the NCP of TFSs are given as follows.

Our discussion has been restricted to a single-target problem for simplicity. Of course, a simple way for detecting multiple targets is to adequately use the decision level r₀ of the statistic for estimating Doppler and the r′₀ of the one for delay, respectively in (32), (37) and to enumerate several targets as functions of r₀, r′₀.

<8.1 Multiple Target Detection Using CDMT>

Consider another approach to multiple target problems. Let {(k_(d,j), l_(D,j))}^(Npath) _(j=1) be N_(path) pairs of delay and Doppler. Divide the target space Θ′=[0,T)×[0,F) into 4 regions: R ₁=[0,T/2)×[0,F/2),R ₂=[0,T/2)×[F/2,F), R ₂=[T/2,T)×[0,F/2),R ₄=[T/2,T)×[F/2,F)   [MF544] and assign TD- and FD-PCs: X={X,X′},y={Y;Y′},Z={Z,Z′},W={W,W′}   [MF545] to each region. Suppose that the 2-D PCs X,Y,Z,W   [MF546] have their chip address sets, defined as

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF547}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{\mathcal{M}_{1} = \left\{ {\left. \left( {m,m^{\prime}} \right) \middle| {0 \leq m \leq {\frac{N}{2} - 1}} \right.,{0 \leq m^{\prime} \leq {\frac{N^{\prime}}{2} - 1}}} \right\}},} \\ {{\mathcal{M}_{2} = \left\{ {\left. \left( {m,m^{\prime}} \right) \middle| {0 \leq m \leq {\frac{N}{2} - 1}} \right.,{\frac{N^{\prime}}{2} \leq m^{\prime} \leq {N^{\prime} - 1}}} \right\}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{\mathcal{M}_{3} = \left\{ {\left. \left( {m,m^{\prime}} \right) \middle| {\frac{N}{2} \leq m \leq {N - 1}} \right.,{0 \leq m^{\prime} \leq {\frac{N^{\prime}}{2} - 1}}} \right\}},} \end{matrix} \\ {\mathcal{M}_{4} = {\left\{ {\left. \left( {m,m^{\prime}} \right) \middle| {\frac{N}{2} \leq m \leq {N - 1}} \right.,{\frac{N^{\prime}}{2} \leq m^{\prime} \leq {N^{\prime} - 1}}} \right\}.}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (80) \end{matrix}$ and their associated signature waveforms, defined by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF548}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{\upsilon^{(i)}\left\lbrack {k;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack} = {\sum_{{({m,m^{\prime}})} \in \mathcal{M}_{i}}{X_{m}^{(i)}X_{m\;}^{\prime{(i)}}\mathcal{T}_{{mM},{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}{{z\lbrack k\rbrack}.}}}} \\ {{\chi^{(i)} = \left( {\left\{ X_{m}^{(i)} \right\},\left\{ X_{m}^{(i)} \right\}} \right)},X_{m}^{(i)},{X_{m}^{\prime{(i)}} \in \left\{ {{- 1},1} \right\}},{\left( {m,m^{\prime}} \right) \in \mathcal{M}_{i}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (81) \end{matrix}$ where χ⁽¹⁾,χ⁽²⁾,χ⁽³⁾,χ⁽⁴⁾ correspond to X,Y,Z,W.   [MF549] Then the CE of the radar signal has the multiple targets form

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF550}\rbrack & \; \\ {{\psi\lbrack k\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{4}{\sum\limits_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}{{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \cdot \mathcal{T}_{{qNM},{{qN}^{''}M^{\prime}}}^{d}}{{\upsilon^{(i)}\left\lbrack {k;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack}.}}}}} & (82) \end{matrix}$

If this CE is transmitted through N_(path) doubly dispersive channels with delay, Doppler, and attenuation factor, respectively denoted by {(t _(d,i) ,f _(D,i) ,A _(i) e ^(iκ) ^(i) )}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF551] then the signal component of its received signal is given by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF552}\rbrack & \; \\ {{r\lbrack k\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{N_{path}}{A_{i}e^{i\;\kappa_{i}}\mathcal{T}_{t_{d,i},f_{D,i}}^{d}{{\psi\lbrack k\rbrack}.}}}} & (83) \end{matrix}$ While, the receiver uses the 2-D PC x (or y)   [MF553] for the TD-template CE of type 3 and FD-template CE of type 4 ψ_(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾[k] and Ψ_(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾[l]   [MF554] in (29), (33) and restricts the range of controlling l _(μ)and k _(σ)   [MF555] respectively of the CCR of type 3 in (38) and of the CCR of type 4 in (43): c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)) and C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF556] to

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF557}\rbrack \\ {{0 \leq \ell_{\mu} \leq {\left\lfloor \frac{M^{\prime}N^{\prime}}{2} \right\rfloor - 1}},{0 \leq k_{\sigma} \leq {\left\lfloor \frac{MN}{2} \right\rfloor - 1}}} \end{matrix}$ for R₁ and to

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF558}\rbrack \\ {{\left\lfloor \frac{M^{\prime}N^{\prime}}{2} \right\rfloor \leq \ell_{\mu} \leq {M^{\prime}N^{\prime}}},{0 \leq k_{\sigma} \leq {\left\lfloor \frac{MN}{2} \right\rfloor - 1}}} \end{matrix}$ for R₂, then it gets the MLEs for the target subspaces R₁, R₂. Similarly the receiver gets MLEs for other regions R₃, R₄. This technique is based on the philosophy behind the CDMA and so is referred to as the code-division multiple target (CDMT)s.

Numerical simulations with N=N′=64, N_(path)=4, SNR≥5 dB showed that 3, 4 targets are successfully detected with probability 80% by using the PUL algorithm.

<8.2 Multiple Target Detection Using Artificial Delay-Dopplei>

As shown in the proof of the convergence of PUL algorithm, TD-CCF of type 3 and FD-CCF of type 4 c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)) and C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF559] respectively using the orthogonal projection operators P₃ onto the T_(s)-time limited (TL) TD-space and P₄ onto F_(s)-band limited (BL) FD-space tell us that a pair of TFSOs of type 3 and of type 1: (T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d) ,T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ) ^(d))   [MF560] (or that of the frequency dual of TFSO of type 3 and the TFSO of type 2: (T _(l) _(D) _(,−k) _(d) ^(l,d) ,T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(l,d)))   [MF561] is an inherent operator due to the NCP of delay and Doppler, and thus plays an essential role in radar and multiplexed communication systems because such a pair contains either a pair of two unknowns (l _(D) ,k _(d))   [MF562] or that of two control-parameters (l _(μ) ,k _(σ))   [MF563] for getting a pair of two MLEs ({circumflex over (l)} _(D) ,{circumflex over (k)} _(d)).   [MF564] On the contrary, the modulation and demodulation TFSOs T _(0,l) _(c) ^(d) ,T _(0,−l) _(c) ^(d)   [MF565] and the data-level and chip-level TFSOs T _(pNM,p′N′M′) ^(d) ,T _(ρM,0) ^(d) ,T _(ρ′M′,0) ^(l,d)   [MF566] with data-level and chip-level addresses ((ρ,ρ′),{right arrow over (p)})   [MF567] are independent of (l_(D),k_(d)).

While, the TD- and FD-CCF pair in (41), (45) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)),C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF568] with address parameters ((ρ,ρ′),{right arrow over (p)})   [MF569] contains the data d _({right arrow over (p)})   [MF570] together with several PDs.

This suggests that if the artificial parameters {k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i)}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF571] (for simplicity setting A _(i) e ^(iκ) ^(i) =1)   [MF572] are embedded in d _({right arrow over (p)}),   [MF573] then such parameters are available for a multiple target problem. For example, consider communication systems based on the NCP of delay and Doppler using N_(path) pairs of TD-TFSOs and TD-CCFs and N_(path) pairs of FD-TFSOs and FD-CCFs, defined as

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF574}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{{pair}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}{TD}\text{-}{TFSOs}\text{:}\left( {\mathcal{T}_{k_{d,i},\ell_{d,i}}^{d},\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d,i},\ell_{\mu,s}}^{d}} \right)},} \\ {{{{TD}\text{-}{CCF}\text{:}{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu,i};{\hat{k}}_{d,i}} \right)}1} \leq i \leq N_{path}},} \end{matrix} \\ \begin{matrix} {{{pair}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}{FD}\text{-}{TFSOs}\text{:}\left( {\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D,i},{- k_{d,i}}}^{f,d},\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D,i},{- k_{\sigma,s}}}^{\ell,d}} \right)},} \\ {{{FD}\text{-}{CCF}\text{:}{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma,i};{\hat{\ell}}_{D,i}} \right)}1} \leq i \leq {N_{path}.}} \end{matrix} \end{matrix} \right\} & (84) \end{matrix}$ with N_(path) pairs of parameters {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF575] Such systems use N_(path) pairs of TD-,FD-templates embedded in transmitted TD- and FD-signatures and PUL algorithm for estimating (k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))   [MF576] where the PUL algorithm was called the “active” PUL[25, 30] in the sense that updating is done at the transmitter, but the adjective active was something of a misnomer because updating is applicable to the receiver only. The above MLE is based on identifying N_(path) pairs of known shifts {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF577] from signals with embedded those shifts. Namely, it is relatively different from the single-target problem. Hence the above PUL is an ordinary PUL.

The CDMT technique can be applied to

-ary   [MF578] phase-shift-keying (PSK) communication with data

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF579}\rbrack & \; \\ {{d_{q} = W_{\mathcal{M}}^{- k_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}}},{W_{\mathcal{M}} = e^{{- i}\;\frac{2\pi}{\mathcal{M}}}},{k_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \in {\mathbb{Z}}},{0 \leq k_{q} \leq {\mathcal{M} - 1.}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Using Npath 2-D PCs and two twiddle factors W

^(l) ,W

^(l′),0≤l,l′≤

−1   [MF580] placed in the front of N′ TD-CCF and N FD-CCF arrays c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d)),C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D))   [MF581] called a “phase tuned layer (PTL)” and replacing the

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF582}\rbrack & \; \\ {{\arg\;\max\limits_{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu}}},{\arg\;\max\limits_{\rho,k_{\sigma}}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ operations for MLE in the PUL by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF583}\rbrack & \; \\ {{\arg\;\max\limits_{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu},\ell}},{\arg\;\max\limits_{\rho,k_{\sigma},\ell^{\prime}}},} & \; \end{matrix}$ by augmenting two PTL variables l,l′.   [MF584] one can get a PTL that plays a role of replacing d _({right arrow over (p)})   [MF585] of the pair of CCFs in (41),(45) by d _({right arrow over (p)}) ·W

^(l) ,d _({right arrow over (p)}) ·W

^(l′)   [MF586] with the result that phase errors in the real parts of the CCFs have Gaussian distribution with mean 0.

The inventor can get good numerical simulation results with N=N′=16,

=8,16   [MF587] and SNR 30 dB. However, when

=16.   [MF588] sidelobes arise the left- and right-hand sides of the main lobe in the distribution, which means decoding errors may occur. Hence only use of simple PD-cancellation methods limit to setting

=8.   [MF589]

Thus, in order to try M-ary communication with

≥32,   [MF590] one can divide the delay-Doppler space Θ′ and the signal TFP S into

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF591}\rbrack & \; \\ \frac{\mathcal{M}}{8} & \; \end{matrix}$ delay-Doppler sub-spaces and sub-TFPs and assign

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF592}\rbrack & \; \\ \left\{ {{\chi^{(i)} = \left( {\left\{ X_{m}^{(i)} \right\},\left\{ X_{m}^{\;^{\prime}{(i)}} \right\}} \right)},X_{m}^{(i)},{X_{m}^{\;^{\prime}{(i)}} \in \left\{ {{- 1},1} \right\}}} \right\}_{i = 1}^{\frac{\mathcal{M}}{s}} & \; \end{matrix}$ to each sub-TFP. Moreover, let us suppose that artificial shifts (k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))   [MF593] are around the center of i-th delay-Doppler sub-space and use the PTLs of W₈=exp(−i2π/8) and W_(M)=exp(−i2π/M), placed in the front of TD- and FD-CCFs, namely,

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF594}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{W_{8}^{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}} \cdot W_{\mathcal{M}}^{j_{T}}},{{for}\mspace{14mu}{TD}\text{-}{CCF}},{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}} \in \left\{ {0,1,\ldots\mspace{14mu},7} \right\}},} \\ {{j_{T} \in \left\{ {0,1,\ldots\mspace{14mu},\frac{\mathcal{M}}{8}} \right)},} \end{matrix} \\ \begin{matrix} {{W_{8}^{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime}} \cdot W_{\mathcal{M}}^{j_{F}}},{{for}\mspace{14mu}{FD}\text{-}{CCF}},{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime} \in \left\{ {0,1,\ldots\mspace{14mu},7} \right\}},} \\ {j_{F} \in {\left\{ {0,1,\ldots\mspace{14mu},\frac{\mathcal{M}}{8}} \right).}} \end{matrix} \end{matrix} \right\} & (85) \end{matrix}$

This results in the following replacement of the PTL for d _({right arrow over (p)})   [MF595] and arg max operation

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF596}\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {\left. d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\Rightarrow{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}} \cdot W_{8}^{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}} \cdot W_{\mathcal{M}}^{j_{T}}} \right.,{argmax}_{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu},\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}},j_{T}},{{for}\mspace{14mu}{TD}\text{-}{CCF}},} \\ {\left. d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}\Rightarrow{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}} \cdot W_{8}^{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime}} \cdot W_{\mathcal{M}}^{j_{F}}} \right.,{argmax}_{\rho,k_{\sigma},\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{\prime},j_{F}},{{for}\mspace{14mu}{FD}\text{-}{{CCF}.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (86) \end{matrix}$ Hence one should require

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF597}\rbrack & \; \\ {\frac{\mathcal{M}}{8} \cdot 8 \cdot \left( {N + N^{\prime}} \right)} & \; \end{matrix}$ CCFs in total. Therefore, one can obtain numerical decoding simulation results for 128-PSK, 256-PSK using 16, 32 2-D PCs. This M-ary PSK communication realized a new class of multiplexing communication, called “delay-Doppler space division muliplex (dD-SDM)” [35, 34]. However, the phase resolution of this system remains within W_(M)=exp(−i2π/M). So, it is consequently unable to realize a high

   [MF598] -ary PSK communication. A new technique to realize a high M-ary PSK communication is proposed as follows.

The inventor can give communication systems with modulation and demodulation of high

   [MF599] -PSK in cooperating with establishing synchronisation, that are capable of being used also as a synchroniser for communication and or radar. First of all, one can provide explanations of FIGS. 12-17 relating to

   [MF600] -ary PSK encoder and decoder as follows.

FIG. 12 illustrates the block-diagram of a transmitted or an encoder) that is capable of being used also as an efficient and high-resolution radar equipped with

   [MF601] -ary PSK communication.

There are two different kinds of states: one is synchronizer/radar state (when the data d_(q→) is on the upward sides of the switches 1-1, 1-2) and another is

   [MF602] -ary PSK communication state (when the data d_(q→) is connected to the down-ward of the switchs 1-1, 1-2). Each state is controlled by the switches. When d _({umlaut over (g)})   [MF603] is

   [MF604] -ary PSK, i.e., the data communication state, the switches are on downward.

The leftmost part of the transmmitter is the input d _({right arrow over (q)})   [MF605] When the transmmitter is in the synchronizer/radar state, it performs four procedures to a chip waveform:

[MF 606] $\begin{matrix} {\begin{pmatrix} \left( {m^{\prime},\overset{->}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}\text{TD}\text{-template}} \\ \left( {m,\overset{->}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}\text{FD}\text{-template}} \end{pmatrix}{\text{generation by the 2-}\text{D}}\mspace{14mu}{PC}_{\chi}} \\ {\&\left( {N^{\prime}/N} \right){{\text{-}\text{TD}\text{-}}/{FD}}\text{-}{template}\mspace{14mu}{multiplexing}} \\ {{\&\left( {P^{\prime}/P} \right)\text{-}{TD}{\text{-}/{FD}}\text{-}{signature}\text{-}},{{and}\mspace{14mu} d_{\overset{->}{q}}\text{-}{multiplexing}}} \end{matrix}$ while when the transmitter is in the data communication state, it performs six procedures to a chip waveform:

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF607}\rbrack & \; \\ {{{{{{{{{{\begin{pmatrix} {\left( {m^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right)\text{-}{TD}\text{-}{template}} \\ {\left( {m,\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right)\text{-}{FD}\text{-}{template}} \end{pmatrix}\mspace{14mu}{generation}\mspace{14mu}{by}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu} 2\text{-}D\mspace{14mu}{PCs}\mspace{14mu}\chi^{(i)}}\&}\left( {N_{1}^{\prime}/N_{1}} \right)\text{-}{TD}{\text{-}/{FD}}\text{-}{template}\mspace{14mu}{multiplexing}}\&}\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)\text{-}{PC}\mspace{14mu}{multiplexed}\mspace{14mu}{signature}}\&}\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)\text{-}{signature}\mspace{14mu}{multiplexing}}\&}\left( {P^{\prime}/P} \right)\text{-}{TD}{\text{-}/{FD}}\text{-}{signature}\text{-}},{{and}\mspace{14mu} d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\text{-}{multiplexing}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Next, in the block of the k-encoder, consisted of the j′-th AC chosen from

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF608}\rbrack & \; \\ \left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) & \; \end{matrix}$ parallel ACs, where the symbol . . .   [MF609] denotes the set of the ACs and the dot. simply its one.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the encoder-switches 1-3, 1-4 choose the j-th AC in the block of the k-encoder, according to j, and the transmitter phase-modulates the output of the encoder by the j′-th PSK symbol W

₀ ^(−j′)   [MF610] which is determined by an encoding of k with integers j, j′, defined as

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF611}\rbrack & \; \\ {{k = {{j\;\mathcal{M}_{0}} + j^{\prime}}},{j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{j^{\prime} = {\left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}.}}} & \; \end{matrix}$

When the switch 1-2 is on upward and downward sides, respectively TD-CEψ[k] and FD-CEΨ[l]   [MF612] in (27) and TD-CEψ^(AC)[k] and FD-CEΨ^(AC)[l]   [MF613] as defined below in (87) respectively, might be passed through the switch. Furthermore, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the transmitter (or the encoder) modulates those CEs by a carrier l _(c)   [MF614] transmits the resultant passband (PB) signal through the main channel (MC) with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D)),   [MF615] and demodulates the noisy PB signal, contaminated by noise, by the carrier l _(c)   [MF616] resulting a received signal.

The explanation of the block-diagram shown in FIG. 12 is over.

If a high

   [MF617] -PSK modulated symbol

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF618}\rbrack & \; \\ {\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\pi\; k}{\mathcal{M}} \right)} & \; \end{matrix}$ is transmitted and is contaminated by both phase noise and additive noise, then a signal

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF619}\rbrack & \; \\ {\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\pi}{\mathcal{M}} \right)} & \; \end{matrix}$ should be resolved. However, its resolution is unrealizable. To solve it, in a k-encoder (the right block in the lower part of FIG. 12), the transmitter encodes k in the form

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF620}\rbrack & \; \\ {{k = {{j\;\mathcal{M}_{0}} + j^{\prime}}},{j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{j^{\prime} = \left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ so as to transmit a lower

₀   [MF621] -PSK modulated symbol

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF622}\rbrack & \; \\ {{\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\pi\; j^{\prime}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}.} & \; \end{matrix}$ While to transmit the encoded integer

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF623}\rbrack & \; \\ {{j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},} & \; \end{matrix}$ the transmitter relies heavily on the joint estimation method of delay and Doppler with high precision, proposed by this disclosure. Namely, the transmitter firstly divides the (t_(d), f_(D))-parameter space Θ′ and the signal time-frequency plane (TFP) S equally into

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF624}\rbrack \\ \left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) \end{matrix}$ sub-parameter spaces Θ^((i),)′ and sub-TFP S^((i)); secondly assigns 2-D PC χ^((i)) to each sub-TFPs; thirdly 2-DBPSK modulates a chip waveform by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF625}\rbrack \\ \left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack} \end{matrix}$ 2-D PCs; fourthly combines those BPSK-modulated signals by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF626}\rbrack \\ {\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) - \chi^{(i)}} \end{matrix}$ -multiplexing; fifthly assumes a situation that the resultant multiplexed signal is transmitted through the j-th channel, called the j-th artificial channel (AC), chosen from

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF627}\rbrack \\ \left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) \end{matrix}$ parallel ACs, according to j, so that those multiplexed signal is time-frequency shifted by about the center of the sub-parameter space Θ^((j),)′; sixthly PSK-modulates the output of the j-th AC by the j′-th

₀   [MF628] -PSK symbol

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF629}\rbrack \\ {W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- j^{\prime}} = {\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\pi\; j^{\prime}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}} \end{matrix}$ to get a transmit CE. The transmitter modulates this CE by the carrier l _(c)   [MF630] and inputs the resultant PB signal to the MC with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D)).   [MF631] External noise is added to the output of the MC. The transmitter demodulates the noisy PB signal by the carrier l _(c)   [MF632] The resultant BB signal yields a received CE.

Next, the explanation of the block-diagram as shown in FIG. 13 is given.

FIG. 13 shows a block-diagram of a receiver/synchroniser (or a decoder) of a communication system of capable of being used also as an efficient and high-resolution radar, equipped with

   [MF633] -ary PSK communication.

When the receiver is in the synchronizer/radar state (i.e., the switch 2-1 is on the upward side), it performs two procedures to a chip waveform:

[MF 634] $\begin{pmatrix} \left( {\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}{TD}\text{-}{template}} \\ \left( {\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}{FD}\text{-}{template}} \end{pmatrix}\mspace{14mu}{generation}\mspace{14mu}{by}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu} 2\text{-}D\mspace{14mu}{PC}_{\chi}$ while when the receiver is in the data communication state (i.e., the switch 2-1 is on the downward side), it firstly decodes k in the k-decoder, denoted by k^(∧) and defined as

[MF 635] ${\hat{k} = {{\hat{j}\;\mathcal{M}_{0}} + \hat{j^{\prime}}}},{\hat{j} = \left\lbrack \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{\hat{j^{\prime}} = \left\{ \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}},$ and secondly performs two procedures a chip waveform:

[MF 636] $\begin{pmatrix} \left( {\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}{TD}\text{-}{template}} \\ \left( {\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} \right) & {\text{-}{FD}\text{-}{template}} \end{pmatrix}\mspace{14mu}{generation}\mspace{14mu}{by}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu} 2\text{-}D\mspace{14mu}{PCs}\;\chi^{(\hat{j})}$ so as to select the j^(∧)-th AC from

[MF 637] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ parallel ACs, where the symbol . . .   [MF638] denotes the set of the ACs and the dot. simply its one.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, when the switch 2-1 is on downward side, the decoder chooses the ĵ   [MF639] -th AC in the block of the k-decoder, according to j^(∧), and the receiver phase-modulates the output of the AC by the j^(∧)′-th PSK symbol W

₀ ^(−ĵ′)   [MF640] to get a template CE. The receiver calculates the CCR between the received CE and this template CE, in the COR-block of the lower part of the diagram of FIG. 13.

The symbol COR means correlation. The big block in the right-hand-side of the COR indicates the block of maximum likelihood estimating (k _(d) ;l _(D)),   [MF641] and Ae ^(iκ), recovering d _({right arrow over (q)})   [MF642] and decoding k^(∧) for the selected chip-level addresses (ρ′,φ: When the receiver is in the synchroniser/radar state (i.e., the switch 2-2 is on the upward side), it performs

[MF 643] $\left. {\underset{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu}}{argmax}\mspace{11mu}\left. {\mathcal{R}\;\left\lbrack {{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{\rho}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)}/\left( {X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}A\; e^{i\;\kappa}} \right)} \right\rbrack}\Updownarrow{PUL} \right.\mspace{14mu} k_{\sigma}^{*}}\rightarrow\left. {{\hat{k}}_{d}\mspace{20mu}\mspace{14mu}\ell_{\mu}^{*}}\rightarrow\left. {\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rightarrow\left. \begin{pmatrix} {{MLE}\text{:}\mspace{11mu}\left( {k_{\sigma}^{*},\ell_{\mu}^{*}} \right)} \\ {{MLE}\text{:}\mspace{11mu}\hat{A}\; e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}} \end{pmatrix}\rightarrow{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\mspace{11mu}{reconstruction}\mspace{79mu}\underset{\rho,k_{\sigma}}{argmax}\mspace{11mu}{\mathcal{R}\;\left\lbrack {{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{\rho}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)}/\left( {X_{\rho}A\; e^{i\;\kappa}} \right)} \right\rbrack}} \right. \right. \right. \right.$ While when the receiver is in the data communication state (i.e., the switch 2-2 is on the downward side), it performs

[MF 644] $\left. {\underset{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}{argmax}\mspace{11mu}\left. {\mathcal{R}\;\left\lbrack {{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{A\; C},{(3)}}\left( {{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)}/\left( {X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}A\; e^{i\;\kappa}} \right)} \right\rbrack}\Updownarrow{PUL} \right.\mspace{14mu} k_{\sigma}^{*}}\rightarrow\left. {{\hat{k}}_{d}\mspace{14mu}\mspace{20mu}\ell_{\mu}^{*}}\rightarrow\left. {\hat{\ell}}_{D}\rightarrow\left. \begin{pmatrix} {{MLE}\text{:}\mspace{11mu}\left( {k_{\sigma}^{*},\ell_{\mu}^{*}} \right)} \\ {{MLE}\text{:}\mspace{11mu}\hat{A}\; e^{i\;\hat{\kappa}}} \end{pmatrix}\rightarrow{\begin{matrix} {k\mspace{14mu}{decoding}} \\ {\hat{k} = {{j^{*}\mathcal{M}_{0}} + j^{\prime,*}}} \end{matrix}\mspace{79mu}\underset{\rho,k_{\sigma},\hat{j}\;,\hat{j^{\prime}}}{argmax}\mspace{11mu}{\mathcal{R}\;\left\lbrack {{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{A\; C},{(4)}}\left( {{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},j,{\hat{j}}^{\prime}} \right)}/\left( {X_{\rho}A\; e^{i\;\kappa}} \right)} \right\rbrack}} \right. \right. \right. \right.$

The explanation of the block-diagram shown in FIG. 13 is over.

Next, consider a situation that a received CE is 2-DBPSK demodulated by a 2-D PC phase modulated chip waveform. When the receiver is in the the data communication state (i.e., the switch 2-1 is on downward), it 2-D BPSK modulates a chip waveform by the estimated ĵ   [MF645] -th 2-D PC x ^((j))   [MF646] and inputs the 2-DBPSK modulated signal to the ĵ   [MF647] -th AC, chosen from

[MF 648] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ parallel ACs and

₀   [MF649] -PSK demodulates the output signal of the AC by the symbol W

₀ ^(−ĵ′)   [MF650] In the final step in the MLE block, the real parts of TD-CCFs and FD-CCFs, normalized by the PC and the attenuation factor R[c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(3))(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;j,j′)/(X′ _(ρ′) ,Ae ^(iκ))],R[C _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(4))(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D) ;j,j′)/(X _(ρ) Ae ^(iκ))]   [MF651] are maximized in terms of 4 variables (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′),(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′)   [MF652] to get MLEs of (k _(d) ,l _(D)).   [MF653] If the PUL algorithm converges, then the receiver gets convergence (k* _(d) ,l* _(D)).   [MF654] Thus the convergence is common in two states. When the receiver is in the synchroniser/radar state (i.e., the switch 2-2 is on the upward side), it recovers d _({right arrow over (q)})   [MF655] while, when the receiver is in the data communication state (i.e., the switch 2-2 is on the downward side), it decodes k in the form k*=j*

₀ +j* ^(,)′   [MF656] by using MLEs for (ĵ,ĵ′).   [MF657] Note that even when the receiver is in the usual synchroniser/radar state (i.e., the switch 2-2 is on the upward side), it is capable of low

₀   [MF658] -PSK modulating/demodulating to convey data d _({right arrow over (q)})   [MF659] e.g.,

₀=8.   [MF660]

FIG. 14 shows the distribution of magnitudes of the real parts of the CCFs on the main channel (MC)'s delay τ and Doppler τ parameter space. It indicates that the main lobe is isolated.

When the transmitter is in the synchroniser/radar state, the main lobe locates at (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF661] and it is discriminated from side lobes, where the double-wave symbol denotes background noise.

FIG. 15 shows the distribution of magnitudes of the real parts of the CCFs on the x-v plane when three parallel ACs are added to the MC.

Three parallel ACs are connected in series in the front of the MC in order to encode k using the

   [MF662] -PSK modulated signal. The MC still remains at (k _(d) ,l _(D)).   [MF663] However, when the ACs are added to the MC and the three series channels, MC+AC0,MC+AC1,MC+AC2 locate at (k _(d) +k _(d) ⁽⁰⁾ ,l _(D) +l _(D) ⁽⁰⁾),(k _(d) +k _(d) ⁽¹⁾ ,l _(D) +l _(D) ⁽¹⁾),(k _(d) +k _(d) ⁽²⁾ ,l _(D) +l _(D) ⁽²⁾),   [MF664] respectively. The time shifts and frequency shifts are simply additive in quantitative terms, However, several new PDs simultaneously arise and are accompanied by group-theoretical property. In order to obtain the distribution as shown in FIG. 15, one needs the rigorous estimation of several PDs and maximization of the real part of the CCFs by using MLE, together with augmenting parameter variables j, j′ to cancel out the PDs, as described in written description of this disclosure. The augmented variables j, j′ may take

${{\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 665} \right\rbrack\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack} + 1},{\mathcal{M}_{0}.}$ different values, respectively.

FIG. 16 shows the symbol's fundamental TFP S of [0, T_(s))×[0, F_(s)) and its 4 partitioned sub-TFPs S^((i)). This partitioning is intended to exploit the AC parameter space of co-dimension 2 having the NCP of TFSs, where the term “co-dimension” means the dimension of the parameter space.

In FIG. 16, the 4-partition (Gabor's partition) of the signal's TFP of time duration T_(s) and bandwidth F_(s) (S⁽⁰⁾, S⁽¹⁾, S⁽²⁾, S⁽³⁾) and the vertical axis is perpendicularly added to the TFP, where a scale of 4 pairs of AC shifts (k _(d) ⁽⁰⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽⁰⁾),(k _(d) ⁽¹⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽¹⁾),(k _(d) ⁽²⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽²⁾),(k _(d) ⁽³⁾ ,l _(D) ⁽³⁾),   [MF666] is attached to it, associated as a third variable of the TFP besides the T and F coordinate axes.

FIG. 17 shows also the 4-partitioned sub-TFPs S^((i)) with assigned PC X^((i)) that is intended to exploit the AC parameter space of co-dimension 2 having the NCP of TFSs.

As shown in FIG. 17, each S^((i)) is time-frequency shifted by (k^((i))d,f^((i))D), 0≤i≤3. The signal's TFP S can be identified with the target space of the parameter of the MC (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF667] having its fundamental unit plane [0,T _(s))×[0,F _(s)).   [MF668] That is, if a target exists around the TFP with data-level address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′)   [MF669] i.e., around the neighborhood of sub-TFP [(p−1)T_(s)·pT_(s))×[(p′−1)F_(s),p′F_(s)) then the target should be discriminated within the data-level address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′),1≤p≤P−1,1≤p′≤P′−1   [MF670] Hence the argmax operation on the two real parts of the CCFs in FIG. 13 needs the data-level address {right arrow over (p)}   [MF671] regardless of the use of data communication.

As discussed above, in the transmitter and receiver, respectively in FIGS. 12 and 13 the upward and downward systems are alternatively switched.

The systems connected to the upward sides of the switches 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 in FIGS. 12 and 13 are those in accordance with an embodiment of the patent [6], while in an embodiment of the present disclosure, the systems connected to the downward sides of these switches are multiplexed communication systems based on the encoder/decoder exploiting the NCP of the TFSs.

FIGS. 12 and 13 enables us to discriminate against the synchroniser/radar not equipped with high M-ary communication and to show originality in this disclosure.

In accordance with an embodiment of this disclosure, in the transmitter and receiver system, in order to transmit

-ary PSK   [MF672] modulated symbol

[MF 673] ${\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2\;\pi\; k}{\mathcal{M}} \right)},{0 \leq k \leq {\mathcal{M} - 1}}$ and to embed efficiently “information” k into its transmit signal, for an integer

₀,1≤

₀≤

,   [MF674] the transmitter prepares

[MF 675] $\left( {{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack\left( {\overset{def}{=}{{the}\mspace{14mu}{integer}\mspace{14mu}{part}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}}} \right)} + 1} \right)$ pairs of 2-DBPSK codes, i.e., pairs of TD-PCs of period N X ^((j)) ={X _(m) ^((j))}   [MF676] and FD-PCs of period N′ X ^((j),t) ={X _(m) ^((j),t)}   [MF677] and divides the fundamental unit plane Θ′=[0,T_(s))×[−F_(s)/2, F_(s)/2) of the delay and Doppler-parameter space Θ_(max)=[0,T _(max))×[−F _(max)/2,F _(max)/2)   [MF678] and the signal's TFP S=[0,T_(s))×[0,F_(s)) equally into

[MF 679] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ sub-parameter spaces and sub-TFPs, respectively denoted as

[MF 680] $\Theta^{(i)},\mathcal{S}^{(i)},{0 \leq i \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},$ where T_(s)=NMΔt, F_(s)=N′M′Δf denote the time duration and band-width of the symbol d _({right arrow over (q)}) ,{right arrow over (q)}=(q,q′),   [MF681] T_(max)=FT_(s), F_(max)=P′F_(s) denote the maxima of delay and Doppler to be detected with integers P, P′, and the sampling intervals Δt, Δf. Next the transmitter decomposes information k given as

[MF 682] $k = {{{\left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack\mathcal{M}_{0}} + \left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}} = {{j\;\mathcal{M}_{0}} + j^{\prime}}}$ and transmits an integer pair (j, j′), i.e., an integer part

[MF 683] ${j = {\left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack\left( {\overset{def}{=}{{the}\mspace{14mu}{integer}\mspace{14mu}{part}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}\frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}}} \right)}},{0 \leq j \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}$ and its fraction fraction part

[MF 684] ${j^{\prime} = {\left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}\left( {\overset{def}{=}{{the}\mspace{14mu}{fractional}\mspace{14mu}{part}\mspace{14mu}{of}\mspace{14mu}\frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}}} \right)}},{0 \leq j^{\prime} \leq {\mathcal{M}_{0} - 1}},$ in place of k. To transmit the encoded integer pair (j, j′), the transmitter 1) 2-D BPSK-modulates a chip waveform of time duration T_(c)=MΔt and bandwidth F_(c)=MΔf by 2-D PC X^((j)); 2) gets a 2-D phase-modulated signal, called a TD-signature and its Fourier Transform (FT), called an FD-signature; 3) time-frequency shifts by data-level shift (T_(s), F_(s)) and combines these time-frequency shifted signatures in a non-overlapping form to obtain a

[MF 685] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)\mspace{14mu}\text{-}{signature}\text{-}{multiplexed}$ signal. Next the transmitter assumes that the multiplexed signal may transmit through an artificial channel (AC) with delay-Doppler shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))),   [MF686] located at around the center of the sub-parameter space Θ^((j),)′. To simulate such a situation, the transmitter makes two TFSOs of type 4 T _(k) _(d) _((j)) _(,l) _(D) _((j)) ^(d) ,T _(l) _(D) _((j)) _(,−k) _(d) _((j)) ^(f,d),   [MF687] act on the multiplexed TD- and FD-signals, respectively. Thirdly, the transmitter PSK-modulates the resulting time-frequency shifted TD-signal by

₀-ary   [MF688] symbol

[MF 689] $W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- \hat{j^{\prime}}}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 690} \right\rbrack$ $\left( {W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}} = {\exp\left( \frac{{- i}\; 2\;\pi}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}} \right),$ (i.e., multiplies the PSK-modulated signal by the symbol d _({right arrow over (g)}),   [MF691] ), and combines these (P/P′) signals in non-overlapping form on the TFP to generate TD-CE and its DFT, FD-CE (cf. FIG. 12), equipped with

₀   [MF692] -ary PSK communication, in place of (27), given by

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 693} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{\psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{k;\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},{P^{\prime} - 1}}\frac{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}^{\prime}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- j^{\prime}}}{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}}} \\ {{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d}^{(j)},\ell_{D}^{(j)}}^{d}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}{\mathcal{T}_{{qNM},{q^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack}}}},} \end{matrix} \\ {{\Psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{\ell;\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{q,{q^{\prime} = 0}}^{{P - 1},P^{\prime}}\frac{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}^{\prime}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- j^{\prime}}}{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}}} \end{matrix} \\ {{\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D}^{(j)},{- k_{d}^{(j)}}}^{f,d}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}\;{\mathcal{T}_{{q^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {qNM}}}^{f,d}{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (87) \\ {where} & \; \\ \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 694} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack},{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack}} & \; \end{matrix}$ denote TD- and FD-signatures (cf. (25)). defined by

$\begin{matrix} \lbrack{MF695}\rbrack & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {{{\upsilon\left\lbrack {k;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N_{1}N_{1}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{{({m,m^{\prime}})} \in I^{(i)}}{X_{m}^{(i)}X_{m^{\prime}}^{{(i)},\prime}\mathcal{T}_{{mM},{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}}}},} \\ {{{V\left\lbrack {\ell;\chi^{(i)}} \right\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{N_{1}N_{1}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{{({m,m^{\prime}})} \in I^{(i)}}{X_{m}^{(i)}X_{m^{\prime}}^{{(i)},\prime}\mathcal{T}_{{m^{\prime}M^{\prime}} - {mM}}^{f,d}{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}{where}} & (88) \\ \lbrack{MF696}\rbrack & \; \\ {I^{(i)},{0 \leq i \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}} & \; \end{matrix}$ denotes the i-th sub-set of the chip address set {(m,m′)}^(N−1,N′−1) _(m=0,m′=0) of S, associated with the i-th sub-TFP S^((i)) as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and

[MF 697] ${N_{1} = \frac{N}{\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}},{N_{1}^{\prime} = {\frac{N^{\prime}}{\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}.}}$ The TD- and FD-CEs in (87) are designed to convey the encoded integers (j,j′) of k to receivers through the MC. However, M-ary communication leads us to set the periods of the TD-PCs and FD-PCs to be nearly

[MF 698] $\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}$ multiples of those for synchronization of communication or target detection to keep estimation precision (a situation that the switches (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2) are on the downward and upward sides in FIGS. 12 and 13 corresponds to with/without the use of data communication).

Eq. (87) tells us that TD- and FD-signatures v[k;X ^((i))],V[l;X ^((i))]   [MF699] are firstly 2-D BPSK-modulated by 2-D PC X^((i)) and secondly the resultant phase modulated signatures are combined in non-overlapped form such as a

[MF 700] ${{\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)\mspace{14mu}\text{-}\chi^{(i)}}\&}\text{-}{signature}\text{-}{multiplexed}$ signal and thirdly such a doubly-multiplexed signal is PSK-modulated by

₀-ary   [MF701] symbol W

₀ ^(−k)   [MF702] and fourthly the PSK-modulated signal is transmitted through the j-th AC with shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))),   [MF703] and fifthly is PSK-modulated by

₀-ary   [MF704] data symbol d′ _({right arrow over (q)}) ·W

₀ ^(−ĵ′)   [MF705]

The final signal is the TD-CE

[MF 706] $\psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{k;\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack$ and its DFT, i.e., the FD-CE

[MF 707] $\Psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{\ell;\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack$ where[MF 708] $d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}^{\prime}$ with data-level address q^(→)=(q, q′) has the value of 1.

At the receiver, an estimated k, denoted by k^(∧) {circumflex over (k)},0≤{circumflex over (k)}≤

−1   [MF709] is decomposed with a decoded pair of integers

[MF 710] ${\hat{j} = \left\lbrack \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{0 \leq \hat{j} \leq \left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{\hat{j^{\prime}} = {{\left\{ \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}\mspace{14mu} 0} \leq \hat{j^{\prime}} \leq {\mathcal{M}_{0} - 1.}}}$

The receiver first makes the estimated TD- and FD-TFSOs of type 4 T _(k) _(d) _((j)) _(,l) _(D) _((j)) ^(d) and T _(l) _(D) _((j)) _(,−k) _(d) _((j)) ^(f,d)   [MF711] representing the j^(∧)-th-AC with shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF712] act on such TD- and FD-signatures, respectively and secondly PSK-demodulates those time-frequency shifted TD- and FD-signatures by

₀-ary W

₀ ^(ŷ)   [MF713] to cancel out the PSK-modulation phase (cf. FIG. 13). The CCFs of type 3 and of type 4 exploiting AC shifts, with encoded integer pair (j,j′) and its augmented pair for argmax operations (j,ĵ′),   [MF714] are concretely given by respectively, in place of (38) and (43)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 715} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},{\hat{j}}^{\prime}}^{{AC},{(3)}}\left( {{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {\quad{{A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{k;\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} \times \left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d}:\ell_{\mu}}^{d}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{\hat{- j^{\prime}}}\mathcal{T}_{k_{d}^{(\hat{j})},\ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{{pNM},{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}\frac{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{{(\hat{j})}\prime}}{\sqrt{N_{1}}}{\sum\limits_{n \in I_{T}^{(\hat{j})}}{\mathcal{T}_{{nM},{p^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}X_{n}^{(\hat{j})}{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}}} \right)^{*}}}},}}} & (89) \\ {{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},{\hat{j}}^{\prime}}^{{AC},{(4)}}\left( {{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {\quad{{A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D},{- k_{d}}}^{f,d}{\Psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {\ell,\left\{ \chi^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} \times \left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- \hat{j^{\prime}}}\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})},{- k_{d}^{(\hat{j})}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M},{- {pNM}}}^{f,d}\frac{X_{\rho}^{(\hat{j})}}{\sqrt{N_{1}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{n^{\prime} \in I_{F}^{(\hat{j})}}{\mathcal{T}_{{n^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {pM}}}^{f,d}X_{n}^{{(\hat{j})}\prime}{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}} \right)^{*}}}},}}} & (90) \end{matrix}$ each of which is called a correlator of type-3 with AC shifts and a correlator of type-4 with AC shifts, respectively. In the transmitter-signal-part (cf. (87)) of the two CCFs above, (i.e., the input part of statistic g (13)) the TFSO of type 4 (or its frequency dual) T _(k) _(d) _((j)) _(,l) _(D) _((j)) ^(d) or T _(l) _(D) _((j)) _(,−k) _(d) _((j)) ^(f,d)   [MF716] is inserted between the product of chip- and data-level shifting TFSO of type 4 (or its frequency dual) at the transmitter (cf. ν [k;X^((i))], V [l;X^((i))] in (88)) T _(qNM,q′N′M′) ^(d) ·T _(mM,m′M′) ^(d) or T _(q′N′M′,−qNM) ^(f,d) ·T _(m′M′,−mM) ^(f,d)   [MF717] and TFSO of type 3, representing the MC with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D)),   [MF718] T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)   [MF719] While, in the receiver-signal-part of the two CCFs (89), (90) (i.e., the signal-to-be-detected part of statistic g (13)), for

   [MF720] -ary PSK modulation, there are

[MF 721] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ different pairs of AC shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF722] Then the associated estimated TFSOs of type 3 representing those ACs T _(k) _(d) _((ĵ)) _(,l) _(D) _((ĵ)) ^(d)   [MF723] (or their frequency dual ones T _(l) _(D) _((ĵ)) _(,−k) _(d) _((ĵ)) ^(f,d)   [MF724] are defined. These TFSOs are inserted between the estimated TFSO of type 1 T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)   [MF725] (or the estimated TFSO of type 2 T _(l) _(D) _(,−k) _(d) ^(f,d))   [MF726] for estimating the MC shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF727] and the product of chip- and data-level shifting TFSOs of type 4 or its frequency dual at the receiver T _(pNM,p′N′M′) ^(d) ·T _(nM,ρ′M′) ^(d) or T _(p′N′M′,−pNM) ^(f,d) ·T _(n′M′,−ρM) ^(f,d)   [MF728]

The transmitter/receiver system shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 that is capable of being used also as an efficient and high-resolution radar, equipped with

   [MF729] -ary PSK communication is a typical example of multiplexing communication systems utilizing non-commutative delay and Doppler shifts of the MC and AC parameter spaces of co-dimension 2, where the fundamental unit plane θ′ of the delay and Dopier parameter space of the MC is exclusively divided, denoted as Θ^((i),)′. So, it is obvious that the term “delay-Doppler space division multiplexing (dD-SDM)” [30], patent [6] is used to refer such a multiplexed system. In this system, in place of transmitting

   [MF730] -ary data k, the transmitter sends a signal containing encoded integers

[MF 731] ${\hat{j} = \left\lbrack \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{{\hat{j}}^{\prime} = {\left\{ \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}.}}$ The integer j is recovered by using the PD due to the delay shift k _(d) ^((j))   [MF732] and Doppler shift l _(D) ^((j)),   [MF733] located at around the center of Θ^((j∧),′) (cf. FIGS. 14,15). To embed (j, j′) into a signal, the transmitter firstly 2-D BPSK-modulates a chip waveform by different 2-D PCs χ^((i)), secondly combines these modulated signals (signatures) in non-overlapped form by

[MF 734] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) - \chi^{(i)}$ -multiplexing, thirdly inputs it to the ĵ   [MF735] -th AC, and fourthly

₀   [MF736] -PSK demodulates the output signal of the AC by the symbol

[MF 737] $\mathcal{M}_{0}\mspace{11mu}{ary}\mspace{14mu}{{\exp\left( \frac{{- i}\; 2\;\pi\;{\hat{j}}^{\prime}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right)}.{{For}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 738} \right\rbrack}}$ $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ different values of ĵ,   [MF739] the transmitter requires

[MF 740] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ parallel ACs and the set of those associated 2-D PCs

[MF 741] $\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}.$ While, at the receiver to detect the template from a fourfold-multiplexed chip waveform, the receiver selects an estimated ĵ   [MF742] -th AC and constructs maximum-likelihood estimates of (k _(d) ,l _(D)).   [MF743] High

   [MF744] -ary PSK communication at the transmitter is realized by

[MF 745] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ -multiplexed low

₀   [MF746] -ary PSK modulations based on using non-commutative AC shifts and 2-D PCs.

Such a multiplexed system, called “delay-Doppler space division multiplexing (dD-SDM)” is a system by dividing the signal space S=[0,T_(s))×[0,F_(s)) into several sub-TFPs and assigning a 2-D PC to each sub TFP for 2-D BPSK modulation. The use of 2-D PC results in adding a new axis perpendicular to the TFP as a third axis (see FIGS. 16 and 17). Namely, this third axis represents a shift-axis, being inherited the NCP from AC shifts of co-dimension 2. Therefore, the dD-SDM is radically different from the conventional division multiple access (DMA): TDMA, FDMA, CDMA, and Multi-carrier (MC)-CDMA. The spread spectrum (SS) code used in the latter two that makes DMA easy by the orthogonality of the code-modulated rectangular chip pulse. The PUL algorithm based on the von Neumann's APT that enables us to jointly estimate delay and Doppler with high precision, and is capable of being used also for an efficient and high resolution radar. Such an M-ary PSK modulation is a proposing and primitive technique in optical communication because the notion of the AC with non-commutative shifts is applicable to a “physical” optical fiber. Such a multiplexed system, called “delay-Doppler space division multiplexing (dD-SDM)” is a system using a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2. This has a three-dimensionalized time-frequency space (TFS), layered by AC shifts (see FIGS. 16 and 17), in which the perpendicular co-ordinate axis to the symbol space, time-frequency plane (TFP) of [0,T_(s))×[0,F_(s)), (which is identified with the unit plane of the target space), is a shift-axis with a scale of non-commutative AC shifts. Thus the dD-SDM is different from the conventional divisions of signal-TFP: TDMA and FDMA. The PUL algorithm based on APT that enables us to estimate parameters with high-speed and high-precision is a fundamental technique. Note that higher M-ary PSK modulation is a promising and primitive technique which is applicable to optical communication because the AC with non-commutative shifts may be replaced by several kinds of physical transmission lines.

The references [30] and patent [6] regarded a multiple targets problem with {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF747] as an application of Code-Division Multiple Target (CDMT)s and gave an target-detection method using N_(path) 2-D PCs and TFSOs with shifts {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF748] together with the phase-cancellations by the product of two twiddle factors

[MF 749] ${W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{\lambda_{\overset{\sim}{p}}} \times W_{\mathcal{M}}^{j}},{\lambda_{\overset{\rightarrow}{p}} \in \left\{ {0,1,\ldots\;,{\mathcal{M}_{0} - 1}} \right\}},{j \in \left\{ {0,1,\ldots\;,{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack - 1}} \right\}},{W_{\mathcal{M}} = {{\exp\left( \frac{{- i}\mspace{11mu} 2\;\pi}{\mathcal{M}} \right)}.}}$ However, this method forces us to resolve small phase quantity

[MF 750] ${\exp\left( \frac{{- i}\mspace{11mu} 2\;\pi}{\mathcal{M}} \right)}.$ Thus when

≥16,   [MF751] decoding errors arise due to phase noise and phase distortions. Furthermore, in the references above, without using both the TFSO of type 3 T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)   [MF752] representing MC shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF753] and its estimated TFSO of type 4 T _(k) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d),   [MF754]

   [MF755] -ary communication were done. Moreover, this approach was not suited to multiple targets problems of a doubly delay-Doppler shifted signal and has no estimation algorithm with guaranteed proof. To solve this, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the inventor defines two new CCFs exploiting the NCP of AC shifts c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(3))(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;j,j′,C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(4))(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D) ;j,j′)   [MF756] respectively defined by (89), (90), in which several PDs are estimated and canceled out, precisely and rigorously. It is not easy to recover d′ _({right arrow over (q)}) ·W

₀ ^(−j′)   [MF757] embedded in TD-CE in (87)

[MF 758] $\psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{k;\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack$ (or FD-CE

$\left. {\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 759} \right\rbrack{\Psi^{A\; C}\left\lbrack {{\ell;\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}} \right)$ by

₀-ary PSK W

₀ ^(−ĵ′)   [MF760] The detail of cumbersome calculations of (89), (90) are omitted here. However, the two CCFs for high

   [MF761] -ary PSK demodulation are required by using

[MF 762] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ 2-D PCs

[MF 763] $\left\{ \left( {X^{(j)},X^{{(j)},i}} \right\}_{j = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack} \right.$ and replacing (k _(d) ,l _(D))⇒(k _(d) +k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) +l _(D) ^((j))),d _({right arrow over (p)})⇒d′ _({right arrow over (p)}) W

₀ ^(−j′)   [MF764] at the transmitter and ({circumflex over (k)} _(d) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D))⇒({circumflex over (k)} _(d) +k _(d) ^((j)) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D) +l _(D) ^((j))),d _({right arrow over (q)}) ⇒d′ _({right arrow over (g)}) W

₀ ^(−ĵ′,(N,N′)⇒(N) ₁ ,N′ ₁)   [MF765] at the receiver. This replacement is accompanied by the occurrence of several new PDs. Hence one should replace 2 variables for MLE operation of 2 variables argmax_(ρ′{right arrow over (p)})   [MF766] (or argmax_(ρ′{right arrow over (p)}))   [MF767] by the one of 4 variables argmax_(ρ′{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′)   [MF768] (or argmax_(ρ′{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′)),   [MF769] where β′ϵI _(F) ^((j))   [MF770] (or ρϵI _(T) ^((j))).   [MF771]

One can obtain generalized versions of (39), (44):

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\lbrack{MF772}\rbrack} & \; \\ {{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{A\; C},{(3)}}\left( {{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {\frac{A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W^{{({k_{d} - {\hat{k}}_{d}})}\ell_{c}}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- {({j^{\prime} - \hat{j^{\prime}}})}}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\;{\frac{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}}{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}\;{\frac{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{{(j)},\prime,*}}{N_{1}\sqrt{N_{1}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{{{({m,m^{\prime}})} \in I^{(i)}},{n \in I_{T}^{(\hat{j})}}}\;{X_{m}^{(i)}X_{m^{\prime}}^{{(i)},\prime}X_{n}^{{(\hat{j})},*} \times {\theta_{gg}\left\lbrack {{\left( {{\hat{k}}_{d} - k_{d}} \right) + \left( {{\hat{k}}_{d}^{(j)} - k_{d}^{(j)}} \right) + {\left( {p - q} \right)M\; N_{1}} + {\left( {n - m} \right)M}},{\left( {\ell_{\mu} - \ell_{D}} \right) + \left( {{\hat{\ell}}_{D}^{(\hat{j})} - \ell_{D}^{(j)}} \right) + {\left( {p^{\prime} - q^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}N_{1}^{\prime}} + {\left( {p^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}}} \right\rbrack} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{k_{d}\ell_{\mu}} - {{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{D}} - {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack}\left( {\ell_{D}^{(j)} + \ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})}} \right)} + {\left( {k_{d}^{(j)} + k_{d}^{(\hat{j})}} \right){v_{0}\left\lbrack \ell_{\mu} \right\rbrack}} - {k_{d}^{(\hat{j})}\ell_{d}^{(j)}} + {k_{d}^{(j)}\ell_{d}^{(\hat{j})}}} \right)} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{2M\; N_{1}q\;{{\overset{\sim}{v}}_{0}\left\lbrack {\ell_{\mu},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}} - {2M^{\prime}N_{1}^{\prime}q^{\prime}{{\overset{\sim}{\tau}}_{0}\left\lbrack {k_{\sigma},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}}} \right)} \times {{W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{\left( {{m\;\rho^{\prime}} - {m^{\prime}n}} \right)M\; M^{\prime}} - {\left( {m^{\prime} + \rho^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}{{\overset{\sim}{\tau}}_{0}\left\lbrack {k_{\sigma},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}} + {\left( {m + n} \right)M\;{{\overset{\sim}{v}}_{0}\left\lbrack {\ell_{\mu},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}}} \right)}.}}}}}}}}} & (91) \\ {{{{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{A\; C},{(4)}}\left( {{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {\frac{A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{\hat{j}}W^{{- {\tau_{0}{\lbrack k_{\sigma}\rbrack}}}\ell_{c}}W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- {({j^{\prime} - \hat{j^{\prime}}})}}}{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\;{\frac{d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}}{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack}{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}\;{\frac{X_{\rho}^{{(\hat{j})},*}}{N_{1}^{\prime}\sqrt{N_{1}}}{\sum\limits_{{{({m,m^{\prime}})} \in I^{(i)}},{n \in I_{F}^{(\hat{j})}}}{X_{m}^{(i)}X_{m^{\prime}}^{{(i)},\prime}X_{n}^{{(\hat{j})},\prime,*} \times {\Theta_{GG}\left\lbrack {{\left( {{\hat{\ell}}_{D} - \ell_{D}} \right) + \left( {{\hat{\ell}}_{D}^{(\hat{j})} - \ell_{D}^{(j)}} \right) + {\left( {p^{\prime} - q^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}N_{1}^{\prime}} + {\left( {n^{\prime} - m^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}}},{{- \left( {k_{\sigma} - k_{d}} \right)} - \left( {{\hat{k}}_{d}^{(\hat{j})} - k_{d}^{(j)}} \right) - {\left( {p - q} \right)M\; N_{1}} - {\left( {\rho - m} \right)M}}} \right\rbrack}}}}}}}}}\quad} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{k_{d}{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} - {k_{\sigma}\ell_{D}} - {{\tau_{0}\left\lbrack k_{\sigma} \right\rbrack}\left( {\ell_{D}^{(j)} + \ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})}} \right)} + {{v_{0}\left\lbrack {\hat{\ell}}_{D} \right\rbrack}\left( {k_{d}^{(j)} + k_{d}^{(\hat{j})}} \right)} - {k_{d}^{(\hat{j})}{\ell_{D}^{(j)}++}k_{d}^{(j)}\ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})}}} \right)} \times {W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{2M\; N_{1}q\;{{\overset{\sim}{v}}_{0}\left\lbrack {\ell_{\mu},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}} - {2M^{\prime}N_{1}^{\prime}q^{\prime}{{\overset{\sim}{\tau}}_{0}\left\lbrack {k_{\sigma},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}}} \right)} \times {{W^{\frac{1}{2}}\left( {{\left( {{m\; n^{\prime}} - {m^{\prime}\rho}} \right)M\; M^{\prime}} - {\left( {m^{\prime} + n^{\prime}} \right)M^{\prime}{{\overset{\sim}{\tau}}_{0}\left\lbrack {k_{\sigma},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}} + {\left( {m + \rho} \right)M\;{{\overset{\sim}{v}}_{0}\left\lbrack {\ell_{\mu},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack}}} \right)}.\mspace{20mu}{where}}} & (92) \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 773} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{{{{\overset{\sim}{\tau}}_{0}\left\lbrack {k_{\sigma},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack} = {k_{\sigma} - k_{d} + k_{d}^{(j)} - k_{d}^{(j)}}},{{{\overset{\sim}{v}}_{0}\left\lbrack {\ell_{\mu},\hat{j}} \right\rbrack} = {\ell_{\mu} - \ell_{D} + \ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})} - \ell_{D}^{(j)}}},}} & \; \\ {\mspace{76mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 774} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{76mu}{I_{T}^{(\hat{j})},I_{F}^{(\hat{j})}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ denote the sets of chip TD- and FD-addresses n,n′ associated with the j^(∧)-th sub-TFP S ^((j))   [MF775] and the product of the address sets I ^((j)) =I _(T) ^((j)) ×I _(F) ^((j)).   [MF776] The ambiguity function (AF)s:θ_(gg)[τ,ν] and Θ_(GG)[τ,ν] respectively in (91) and (92) with Gaussian functions g,G are separable and decay exponentially in terms of τ,ν. This well-known property and the disjoint chip address sets I ^((j)) ,I _(T) ^((j)) ,I _(F) ^((j))   [MF777] and the fact that (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF778] is at around the center of Θ^((j)) tell us that among the first and second arguments of the AF all of the terms relating to (p−q)MN₁; (p′−q′)M′N₁′ with p′≠q′, p≠q and (m,m′)ϵI ^((i)) ,n,ρϵI _(T) ^((i)) ,n′,ρ′ϵI _(F) ^((ĵ))   [MF779] with i≠j^(∧) can be neglected. Thus, the terms with p′=q′, p=q and i=ĵ   [MF780] remain and thus only the term equal to {right arrow over (p)}   [MF781] is selected from the summation

[MF 782] $\sum\limits_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 783} \right\rbrack$ ĵ = j is identified via the functions τ^(˜) ₀[k_(σ),j^(∧)],ν^(˜) ₀[l_(μ),j^(∧′)] with k_(σ)≅k_(d), l_(μ)≅l_(D). This is the reason why the transmitter divides exclusively Θ, 2-D BPSK modulates a chip waveform by 2-D PCs χ^((i)), and combines these modulated signatures in non-overlapped form to realize

[MF 784] $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ -multiplexing based on

[MF 785} $\left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right)$ parallel ACs that are intended to introduce non-commutative shifts. While ĵ′=j′   [MF786] is identified by the PD cancelation term W

₀ ^(−(j′−ĵ′))   [MF788]

The two CCFs above use independent 2-D PCs

[MF 789] $\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}$ and PDs due to non-commutative AC shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF790] as functions of an estimated integer

[MF 791] $\hat{j} = \left\lbrack \frac{\hat{k}}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack$ for an encoded integer

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 792} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack} & \; \end{matrix}$ of an integer k. The TD- and FD-CCFs provide us with a decoding method using PUL-based MLEs. This method can guarantee the phase resolution at least

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 793} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}} = {\exp\left( {- \frac{i\; 2\pi}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}} \right)}} & \; \end{matrix}$ and hence is resistant to phase noise.

It is natural to precisely estimate delay and Doppler for radar and establish synchronization of communication systems before encoding and decoding

   [MF794] -ary PSK data. Since one should confront a realistic situation that a transmitted signal through the MC with shifts (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF795] is processed at the receiver, we need two CCFs with AC shifts in (91) and in (92). Such receivers when the switches are on upward in FIGS. 12, 13 work as a synchronizer (i.e., acquisition and tracking) when the switches are on the downward side, combine a synchronizer and a decoder for

   [MF796] -ary PSK communication, and work as a radar equipped with data transmission. This system is an amplitude-shift-keying (ASK)-free

   [MF797] -ary PSK communication and provides a secret wireless communication system whose secret keys are 2-D PCs

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 798} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {\left\{ {\mathcal{X}^{(i)} = \left( {X^{(i)},X^{{(i)},\prime}} \right)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}}\rbrack}.} & \; \end{matrix}$

The main reason that receivers employ ASK-free modulation is twofold: (1) adaptive and dynamic estimation of the attenuation factor Ae^(iκ); (2) a simplification of a decoder. Estimating and Canceling out PDs enable us to realize high

   [MF799] -ary PSK communication as an efficient use of radio resources. Note that the use of

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 800} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) & \; \end{matrix}$ 2-DPCs implies

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 801} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left( {\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1} \right) & \; \end{matrix}$ -user multiplexed communication. <8.3 Signal Processing Exploiting Multi-Dimensional Non-Commutative Spatial-Spatial Frequency Shifts>

Daughman [33, 34] gave a 2-D version of Gabor elementary functions

$\begin{matrix} {{{g_{m,m^{\prime}}(t)}\overset{def}{=}{{g\left( {t - {mT}_{c}} \right)}e^{i\; 2{\pi m}^{\prime}}{F_{c}^{\;^{\prime}}\left( {t - {mT}_{c}} \right)}}},{t\mspace{14mu}\epsilon\mspace{11mu}{\mathbb{R}}}} & \lbrack{MF802}\rbrack \end{matrix}$ and pointed out that 2-D Gabor representation (to be defined below) is useful for image analysis and segmentation. Before discussing Daughman study, one should consult the Heisenbeig group theory reviewed by Howe [5]. For t,τ,νϵ

^(n)   [MF803] define two shift operators

[MF804] $\begin{matrix} {{{T_{\tau}{f(t)}}\overset{def}{=}{f\left( {t - \tau} \right)}},{{M_{v}{f(t)}}\overset{def}{=}{e^{{i2\pi v} \cdot t}{{f(t)}.}}}} & (93) \end{matrix}$ where ν-t denotes the inner product. For z∈

   [MF805] introduce the scalar operator

$\begin{matrix} {{S_{z}{x(t)}}\overset{def}{=}{{{zx}(t)}.}} & \lbrack{MF806}\rbrack \end{matrix}$ Then the set {M _(v) T _(r) S _(z):ν₁τϵ

^(n) ,zϵ

}   [MF807] is a group of unitary operators on L ²(

).   [MF808] Consider the set H=

^(n)×

^(n)×

,   [MF809] called the (reduced) Heisenbeig group of degree n and define on it a law of combination [MF810] (ν₁,τ₁ ,z ₁)(ν₂,τ₂ ,z ₂)=(ν₁+ν₂,τ₁+ρ₂ ,e ^(−2πiν) ² ^(·τ) ¹ z ₁ z ₂).  (94) Define a map p, i.e., a faithful unitary representation of H and an automorphism r of H by the rule

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 811} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {p:\left( {v,\tau,z} \right)} & \rightarrow & {M_{v},T_{\tau},S_{z},} \\ {r\left( {v,\tau,z} \right)} & \rightarrow & {\left( {{- \tau},v,{e^{2\pi\; u\; i\;{\tau \cdot v}}z}} \right).} \end{matrix} \right\} & (95) \end{matrix}$ Then it is immediate to verify that the FT, denoted as ^(∧) intertwines the two representations of H ρ and ρ or   [MF812] with each other. That is, [5] [MF813] ^(∧)ρ(h)=ρ(r(h))^(∧)  (96) Daughman [35] pointed out that the model of the 2-D receptive field profiles encountered experimentally in cortical simple cells, which captures their salient tuning properties of spatial localization, orientation selectivity, spatial frequency selectivity, and quadrature phase relationship, is the parameterized family of “2-D Gabor filters”. In terms of a space-domain (SD) impulse response function (or a complex Gabor function) g(x) with SD variables x=(x,y)   [MF814] and its associated 2-D FT, i.e., spatial frequency-domain (SFD) function ĝ(u)=F ²[g(x)]   [MF815] with SFD variables u=(u,v),   [MF816] the general functional form of 2-D Gabor filter family is specified in [35, 36]

⁢[ MF ⁢ ⁢ 817 ] g ⁡ ( x ) = Ke - π ⁢ ⌊ a 2 ⁡ ( x - x 0 ) 2 + b 2 ⁡ ( y - y 0 ) r 2 ⌋ · e i ⁡ ( 2 ⁢ π ⁡ ( u 0 ⁢ x + v ⁢ 0 ⁢ y ) + P ) , g ^ ⁡ ( u ) = K a ⁢ ⁢ b ⁢ e - π ⁡ [ ( u - u 0 ) r 2 ⁢ a - 2 + ( v - v 0 ) r 2 ⁢ b - 2 ] · e i ⁡ ( - 2 ⁢ π ⁡ ( x 0 ⁡ ( u - u 0 ) + y 0 ⁡ ( v - v 0 ) ) + P ) } ( 97 ) where P denotes the phase of the sinusoid such that the dc component is zero, and (x−x ₀)_(r),(y−y ₀)_(r)   [MF818] stand for a clockwise rotation of the operation by θ such that

[ MF ⁢ ⁢ 819 ] ( x - x 0 ) r = ( x - x 0 ) ⁢ cos ⁢ ⁢ θ + ( y - y 0 ) ⁢ sin ⁢ ⁢ θ , ( y - y 0 ) r = - ( x - x 0 ) ⁢ sin ⁢ ⁢ θ + ( y - y 0 ) ⁢ cos ⁢ ⁢ θ . } ( 98 ) The SD function g(x), SFD function ĝ(u)   [MF820] are perfectly symmetrical and have their shifts x ₀=(x ₀ ,y ₀),u ₀=(u ₀ ,v ₀)   [MF821] at which 2-D Gaussian envelope has the peak value. An important property of the family of 2-D Gabor filters is their achievement of the theoretical lower bound of joint uncertainty in the two conjoint domains of x and u. Defining uncertainty in each of the four variables by the normalized second moments √{square root over (σ_(z) ²)},√{square root over (σ_(y) ²)},√{square root over (σ_(u) ²)},√{square root over (σ_(v) ²)}   [MF822] about the principle axes, a fundamental uncertainty principle exists [35, 36]: [MF823] √{square root over (σ_(z) ²)}√{square root over (σ_(u) ²)}≥¼π,√{square root over (σ_(y) ²)}√{square root over (σ_(v) ²)}≥¼π   (90) and the lower bound of the inequality is achieved by the family of 2-D Gabor filters (97). where u ₀=(u ₀ ,v ₀),{right arrow over (α)}=(α,β)   [MF824] are modulation, scaling parameters of Gaussian.

He proposed a simple neural network (NN) architecture for finding optimal coefficient values in arbitrary 2-D signal transforms which in general might be neither complete nor orthogonal as follows.

Consider some discrete 2-D signal I[x], say, an image supported on [256×256] pixels in x, which one wants to analyze or compress by representing it as a set of expansion coefficients {a_(i)} on some set of 2-D elementary functions {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]},{right arrow over (θ)}_(i)=(x _(0i) ,u _(0i),{right arrow over (α)}_(i)),x _(0i)=(x _(0i) ,y _(0i)),u _(0i)=(u _(0i) ,v _(0i)),{right arrow over (α)}_(i)=(α_(i),β_(i)).   [MF825] The attempt to represent I[x] either exactly or in some optimal sense by projecting it onto a chosen set of vectors {g[x;θ^(→) _(i)]} is reduced to finding projection coefficients {a_(i)} such that the resultant vector H[x]

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 826} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}} & (100) \end{matrix}$ minimizes the squared norm of the difference-vector E=∥I[x]−H[x]∥². If a given image I[x] is regarded as a vector in an n-D vector space (e.g. n=65 536), then the optimal coefficients {α_(i)}_(i=1) ^(n)   [MF827] is determined by a system of n simultaneous equations in n unknowns; but it is impractical to solve this huge system. So he proposed NN architectures with connection strength {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}   [MF828] and input image I[x]. 2-D Gabor representations for image analysis and compression, edge detections, feature detectors etc. have been proposed. [37, 38, 39] In this disclosure, the inventor points out that the 2-D Gabor expansion (100) can be regarded as a conjoint 2-D spatial/spatial frequency (S/SF) representation using non-commutative shifts (x_(0i),u_(0i)) in terms of 2-D Gabor functions {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}   [MF829] with shifts (x_(0i),u_(0i)): According to an important precedent for 1-D signal processings exploiting the non-commutativity of time-frequency shifts, presented in the previous sections in this disclosure, it is natural to consider SD representation (100) and its associated SFD representation, symmetrically. To do it, let 2-D FT of I[x] and H[x] Î[u]=F ⁽²⁾[I[x]],Ĥ[u]=F ⁽²⁾[H[x]],   [MF830] Then the conjoint spatial/spatial frequency representation, in place of (100), is defined as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 831} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}},{{H\lbrack u\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}{a_{i}^{\prime}{{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}.}}}}} & (101) \end{matrix}$ and let ε,ε′ be two subspaces of the Hilbert space. Suppose that I[x]ϵε,Î[u]ϵε′.   [MF832] The squared norms of errors ∥I[x]−H[x]∥² ,∥I[u]−H[u]∥²   [MF833] are minimized by the use of two orthogonal projection operator (PO)s projecting onto ε_(i), ε′_(i) (defined below), respectively {P _(g(x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎ :P _({right arrow over (g)}(u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎}_(i=1) ^(n).   [MF834] The projection theorem [27] tells us that I[x],Î[u]   [MF835] possess their unique decomposition

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 836} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{I(x)} = {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}{P_{g{({x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}})}}{I(x)}{g\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}} + {g^{\bot}\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}},} \\ {{{P_{g{({x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}})}}{I(x)}} = \frac{\sum_{x}{{g^{*}\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} \cdot {I(x)}}}{\sum_{x}{{g\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}^{2}}},} \\ {{{\hat{I}(u)} = {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}{P_{\hat{g}{({u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}})}}{\hat{I}(u)}{\hat{g}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}} + {{\hat{g}}^{\bot}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}},} \\ {{{P_{\hat{g}{({u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}})}}{\hat{I}(u)}} = \frac{\sum_{u}{{{\hat{g}}^{*}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} \cdot {\hat{I}(u)}}}{\sum_{u}{{\hat{g}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)}}^{2}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (102) \end{matrix}$ where g^(⊥)(x;θ^(→) _(i)), g^(∧⊥)(u;θ^(→) _(i)) are orthogonal complements of g(x; θ^(→) _(i)), g^(∧)(u;θ^(→) _(i)), respectively. Therefore it is important to choose a set of templates {g(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)),ĝ(u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))}_(i=1) ^(n).   [MF837] For example, let ε_(i) be the set of all fϵl₂(Z) that are (L₁Δx×L₂Δy) space-limited (SL) signals and let ε′_(i) be that of (L₁Δu×L₂Δv) spatial frequency-limited (SFL) signals. Suppose that g(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))ϵε_(i) and ĝ(u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))ϵε′_(i)   [MF838] Then, P _(g(x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎ ,P _(ĝ(u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎   [MF839] are POs projecting onto ε_(i),ε′_(i); respectively. Apply the von Neumann's APT to the two POs and we use 2 2×2-D localization operators (LOs) defined by [MF840] P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d) P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) ,P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d)  (103) then one can get optimized expansion coefficients given as a _(i) ˜P _(g(x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎ I(x),a′ _(i) ˜P _(ĝ(u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎ I(u),a _(i) ˜a′ _(i),1≤i≤n.  (104) Such 2-D LOs select a limited 4-D cube [L ₁ Δx×L ₂ Δy]×[L′ ₁ Δu×L′ ₂ Δv]⊂

⁴   [MF842] around the peak address (x_(0i),u_(0i)) in the 4-D spatial/spatial frequency plane and filter out the rest. where g ^(⊥)(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))ϵε_(i) ^(⊥)and ĝ ^(⊥)(u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))ϵε_(i) ^(⊥,)′.   [MF843] ε_(i) ^(⊥),ε_(i) ^(⊥,)′   [MF844] are orthogonal complements of ϵ_(i),ε′_(i)   [MF845]

Contrary to Howe's shift operators (93), for the SD- and SFD-signals z(x),{circumflex over (z)}(u)   [MF846] the inventor introduces “half-shifts” for the symmetrical property e ^(−iπu) ⁰ ^(·x) ⁰ ,e ^(iπx) ⁰ ^(·u) ⁰ ·x ₀=(x ₀ ,y ₀),u ₀=(u ₀ ,v ₀)ϵ

²   [MF847] and uses 2×2-D von Neumann's symmetrical spatial-spatial frequency shift operator (SSFSO)s with those half-shifts, defined by

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 848} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{x_{0},u_{0}}^{(2)}{z(x)}} = {{z\left( {x - x_{0}} \right)} \cdot e^{i\; 2\pi\;{u_{0} \cdot {({x - \frac{x_{0}}{2}})}}}}},{{\mathcal{T}_{u_{0},{- x_{0}}}^{{(2)},f}{\hat{z}(u)}} = {{\hat{z}\left( {u - u_{0}} \right)} \cdot e^{{- i}\; 2\pi\;{x_{0} \cdot {({u - \frac{u_{0}}{2}})}}}}}} & (105) \end{matrix}$ for the 2-D Gabor function with peak-address x₀=(x₀, y₀), u₀=(u₀, v₀)ϵR² in 2×2-D SD-SFD space g(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))   [MF849] and its FT ĝ(u:{circumflex over (θ)} _(i))=F ⁽²⁾[g(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))].   [MF850]

Thus, the inventor can rewrite the Gabor functions as

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 851} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{\left. {{g\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} = {\mathcal{T}_{x_{0i},u_{0i}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{x^{2}\alpha_{i}^{2}} + {y^{2}\beta_{i}^{2}}})}}} \cdot e^{2i\;\pi\;{x \cdot u}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack \cdot e^{{- \pi}\;{{iu}_{0i} \cdot x_{0i}}}},} \\ {{\hat{g}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} = {{\mathcal{T}_{u_{0i},{- x_{0i}}}^{{(2)},f}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{u^{2}\alpha_{i}^{- 2}} + {v^{2}\beta_{i}^{- 2}}})}}} \cdot e^{{- 2}i\;\pi\;{x \cdot u}}} \right\rbrack} \cdot {e^{\pi\;{{ix}_{0i} \cdot u_{0i}}}.}}} \end{matrix} \right\} & (106) \end{matrix}$ Consider the DFT of the above signals. Let (Δx,Δy) be the sampling intervals of 2-D space variables x=(x,y)   [MF852] with Cartesian lattice dimensions (L₁, L₂). Let z[{right arrow over (k)}]   [MF853] be a discrete SD function whose discrete space variable is

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 854} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{\overset{\rightarrow}{k} = {\left( {k_{1},k_{2}} \right) \in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}},{k_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{k_{2} = {\left\lfloor \frac{y}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor.}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Then the sampling interval of 2-D spatial frequencies u=(u,v)   [MF855] appropriate to the L₁, L₂ spatial lattice are given by Δu=1/(L ₁ Δx),Δv=1/(L ₂ Δy)   [MF856] and its discrete spatial frequency variable is given by

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 857} \right\rbrack & \; \\ {{\ell = {\left( {\ell_{1},\ell_{2}} \right) \in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}},{\ell_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{\ell_{2} = {\left\lfloor \frac{v}{\Delta\; v} \right\rfloor.}}} & \; \end{matrix}$ Using 2 twiddle factors

[MF 858] ${W_{1} = e^{{- i}\;\frac{2\pi}{M}}},{W_{2} = e^{i\;\frac{2\pi}{N}}}$ and 2-D ID FT F ^((2),d)[⋅], and 2-D IDFT F ^(−1,(2),d)[⋅],   [MF859] one can obtain the relationships between an SFD function Z[{right arrow over (l)}]   [MF860] and an SD function

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 861} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack}} & \; \\ {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 862} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{F}^{{- 1},{(2)},d}\left\lbrack {z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack} \right\rbrack}\overset{def}{=}{\frac{1}{\sqrt{L_{1}L_{2}}}{\sum\limits_{k_{1},{k_{2} = 0}}^{{L_{1} - 1},{L_{2} - 1}}\;{{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{k_{1}\ell_{1}}W_{2}^{k_{2}\ell_{2}}}}}}},{0 \leq \ell_{i} \leq L_{i}},{i = 1},2,} \\ {{{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{F}^{{(2)},d}\left\lbrack {Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack} \right\rbrack}\overset{def}{=}{\frac{1}{\sqrt{L_{1}L_{2}}}{\sum\limits_{\ell_{1},{\ell_{2} = 0}}^{{L_{1} - 1},{L_{2} - 1}}{{Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{{- k_{1}}\ell_{1}}W_{2}^{{- k_{2}}\ell_{2}}}}}}},{0 \leq k_{i} \leq L_{i}},{i = 1},2.} \end{matrix} \right\} & (107) \end{matrix}$

Thus the SD function z[{right arrow over (k)}]   [MF863] (or the SFD function Z[{right arrow over (l)}])   [MF864] has support L ₁ Δx×L ₂ Δy   [MF865] (or L ₁ Δu×L ₂ Δv   [MF866]

If the spacing of the peak-address x_(0i) (or u_(0i)) on the SD space (or SFD space) is (M _(x) Δx,M _(y) Δy) or (M _(u) Δu,M _(v) Δv)   [MF867] and the normalization condition M _(x) Δx×M _(u) Δu=M _(y) Δy×M _(v) Δv=1   [MF868] is imposed, then L ₁ =M _(z) M _(u) ,L ₂ =M _(y) M _(v)   [MF869]

If discrete space/spatial frequency shifts of g(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)),ĝ(u:{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))   [MF870] are given as

[MF 871] ${a_{i} = \left( {a_{i\; 1},a_{i\; 2}} \right)},{b_{i} = {\left( {b_{i\; 1},b_{i\; 2}} \right) \in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}},{a_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{a_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{y_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{v_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; v} \right\rfloor},$ then 2×2-D von Neumann's discrete SSFSOs become

$\begin{matrix} \left\lbrack {{MF}\; 872} \right\rbrack & \; \\ \left. \begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{a_{i},b_{i}}^{{(2)},d}{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack}} = {{z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{k} - \overset{\rightarrow}{a}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{- {b_{1}{({k_{1} - \frac{a_{1}}{2}})}}}W_{2}^{- {b_{2}{({k_{2} - \frac{a_{2}}{2}})}}}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{b_{i},{- a_{i}}}^{{(2)},f,d}{Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack}} = {{Z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} - \overset{\rightarrow}{b}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{a_{1}{({\ell_{1} - \frac{b_{1}}{2}})}}W_{2}^{a_{2}{({\ell_{2} - \frac{b_{2}}{2}})}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\} & (108) \end{matrix}$ These 2×2-D symmetrical SSFSOs contain 2-D half shifts

[MF 873] ${{W_{1}}^{\frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot {W_{2}}^{\frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}},{{W_{1}}^{- \frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot {W_{2}}^{- \frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}}$ respectively, as phase terms of SD and SFD signals z[{right arrow over (k)}],Z[{right arrow over (l)}].   [MF874] Thus the SFSOs (108) may be useful for image analysis, feature extraction, and data compression because (a _(i) ,b ₂)i.e.,(x _(0i) ,u _(0i))   [MF875] are efficiently extracted through the inner product of the projection coefficients in (102). Note that image analysis which involves a temporal change is considered to be a subject of a signal processing exploiting three-dimensional NCP.

9 Distinguishing Characteristics of the Invention, and of the Manner and Process of Making and Using it

Embodiments, mathematical formulae and figures, described in a written description of the invention, and of the manner and process of making and using it are merely just ones of examples of the process and/or method of the invention. The inventor can honestly say that some of embodiments are realized examples of communication systems exploiting the NCP of TFSs, that Gabor prospected deliberately in the 1952 paper. [2]

The non-overlapping superposition of signals on the TFP necessarily entails PDs due to the NCP of TFSs. Most of researchers in the field of communication, however, has little or no understanding of TFSs with the NCP. Under such a situation, communication systems exploiting the NCP of TFSs are expected to provide a new class of digital multiplexed communication systems.

Communication systems exploiting the NCP of TFSs, given in this disclosure, can be restated from the following five different points of view.

(Viewpoint 1)

The symmetrical time and frequency shift operator (TFSO), defined and introduced in the references (patent [1] and [26, 27, 30]) has the properties: (i) its “half shifts”, i.e., TD- and FD-PDs that are embedded into TD- and FD-signatures makes clear shift's important role in parameter estimation; (ii) the PD due to modulation and demodulation by the carrier l_(c), accompanied by the delay k_(d) W′ ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF876] always arises; (iii) the fact that any PDs being embedded into a signal can be compactly expressed in terms of powers of the twiddle factor

[MF 877] ${W = e^{{- i}\frac{2\;\pi}{L}}},$ makes estimations of several PDs and canceling out the PDs easy.

(Viewpoint 2)

The TD- and FD-PC modulation, i.e., 2-D binary phase-shift-keying (BPSK)) is a well-known modulation technique. However if one can regard it as an example that TFSOs are available, then one can see that TD- and FD-templates are embedded in a wide-band signal modulated by 2D-PCs.

(Viewpoint 3)

The non-overlapped superposition of signals on the TFP is a conventional method as an efficient use of radio resources. However, this superposition needs the use of TFSO that causes a data-level PD. Fortunately, such a PD plays an important role in parameter estimation.

(Viewpoint 4)

Contrary to conventional use of maximum likelihood (ML) TD-functionals only, the ML TD- and FD-functionals define arrays of TD- and FD-CCFs, respectively for detecting TD- and FD-templates. TD- and FD-CCFs define orthogonal projection operator (PO)s P₃, P₄ (or P₁, P₂), respectively projecting onto time-limited (TL) and band-limited (BL) spaces as subspaces of the Hilbert space. These POs provide a frame on which a deeper understanding of the APT can be built.

(Viewpoint 5)

Contrary to popular belief that a non-Nyquist Gaussian is useless,

the alternative POs representing a conjunction of the two POs P ₃ F ^(−1,d) P ₄ F ^(d)   [MF878] (or P ₄ F ^(d) P ₃ F ^(−1,d)   [MF879] becomes a localization operator in cooperation with the use of Gaussian having properties: self-dual of the FT, separable and exponentially decaying Gaussian's AF in terms of delay and Doppler. This leads the fact that arrays of TD- and FD-CCFs yield excellent receivers.

The inventor makes all of the above viewpoints clear after publications in the patents and non-patent references. This disclosure features its own novelty. All features of novelty are prescribed as follows

(Point 1 of Novelty)

Multiplexed communication systems exploiting the NCP of the TFSs on the TFP are provided. Also algorithms for evaluating PDs due to the TFSs and for canceling out their PDs are given based on symmetrical TFSOs in (4), (24). Furthermore, such an operation pair of embedding- and canceling-out-PDs is shown to be of crucial importance.

(Point 2 of Novelty)

Doppler- and delay-estimate likelihood TD- and FD-functionals, respectively enable us to get ML estimators of parameters and realize canceling-out-PDs by their associated MLE correlators.

(Point 3 of Novelty)

It is shown that the classical BPSK modulation is causing PDs due to the NCP of its TFSs, but fortunately these PDs provide a clue about parameter estimation and signal reconstruction.

(Point 4 of Novelty)

Both the non-overlapped superposition of signals on the TFP and modulation (or demodulation) for a baseband (or passband) signal, accompanied by a delay, as a conventional technique in communication, induce PDs due to the NCP of their TFSs. Fortunately, embedding-and-canceling-out-PD techniques play an important role in detecting a data-level signal.

(Point 5 of Novelty)

All of the above PDs are canceled out by TD- and FD-CCFs. These CCFs induce TD- and FD-POs projecting onto the TL- and BL-signal spaces, respectively as subspaces of the Hilbert space. Applying the von Neumann's alternative projection theorem (APT) to the two subspaces defines the combined operator of the two POs, called a localization operator (LO) on the TFP.

(Point 6 of Novelty)

Youla's signal restoration method using the APT enables us to prove that the LO guarantees the convergence of the alternative parameter-updating algorithm, called PUL. This implies that the LO, as a function of data- and chip-level addresses, becomes a new kind of filters in place of a conventional sharp filter in the DSP and works well for a radar with no limitation on the maxima of delay and Doppler.

(Point 7 of Novelty)

A 2-D signal, i.e., image is usually described by conjoint spatial (S)/spectral frequency (SF) representations, 2-D Gabor representations in particular. However, many researchers using conventional techniques are unaware that 2-D S and SF shift (SSFS)s, implicitly involved in 2-D Gabor functions induce unexpectedly PDs due to their NCP like 1-D TFSs. The inventor treats an S domain (SD) signal and an SF domain (SFD) signals symmetrically and introduces conjoint S/SF representations of dimension 2×2 in terms of 2-D Gabor functions and their 2-D FTs, defined as (101), in place of the problem of representing image in terms of 2-D Gabor functions (100).

Such a new symmetrical conjoint problem of representing image (101) can be solved by the SD and SFD decomposition 102) using orthogonal projection operator (PO)s projecting onto SD- and SFD-limited spaces as subspaces of the Hilbert space, respectively defined as P _(g(x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎ ,P _(ĝ(u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) ₎   [MF880] 2-D Gabor functions are defined using symmetrical space and spatial frequency shift operator (SSFSO)s (105) (or (108)). Furthermore, the combined 2×2-D localization operator (LO)s (103) of the two POs that the von Neumann's APT can be applied provide the basics of 2-D signal processing theory exploiting the NCP of SSFSs for purposes such as image analysis, feature extraction, and data compression.

Example 1 of Embodiments of Transmitter-Receiver System

An example as an embodiment of transmitter-receiver systems based on the above-described theoretical aspects is given together with cited figures.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 18 shows a block-diagram representing the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 attached to its surrounding dotted line. The communication system with the number 1 comprises the transmitter apparatus 100 and the receiver apparatus 200. This transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 is used for both a radar and a communication system (e.g., transmitter-receiver system to convey voice data and or image data).

(The Transmitter Apparatus 100)

The transmitter apparatus 100 is an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a transmitter as described in the above description.

As shown in FIG. 18, the transmitter apparatus 100 comprises an acquisition part of transmitting data 101, a generator part of a transmitting signal 102, and a transmitter part 103 as an example.

(The Acquisition Part of Transmitting Data 101)

The acquisition part of transmitting data 101 makes acquisition of data to be transmitted; The transmitting data is, e.g., acoustic data, image data, and may be text data such as any digitized data.

If the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 is used for radar, then the transmitting data may be a radar pulse wave.

(The Generator Part of a Transmitting Signal 102)

The generator part of a transmitting signal 102 performs signal processing transmitting data obtained by the acquisition part of transmitting data 101 and generates a transmitting signal.

The generator part of a transmitting signal 102 comprises SFBs as shown in FIGS. 4-7 or at least one of them as an example.

As above mentioned, an example of processing for generators of a signal to be transmitted is the modulation by TD- and FD-phase code (PC)s of periods N,N′, i.e., 2-D BPSK modulation.

Examples of a transmitting signal generated by the generator part of a signal to be transmitted 102 are e.g., as mentioned above TD,FD pulse waveforms:g[k],G(l), TD,FD templates:u _(m′) ⁽³⁾[k;X],U _(m) ⁽⁴⁾[l,X′], TD,FD signatures:v[k;X],V[l,X], TD,FD signals to be transmitted:s[k;X],S[l;X], CE of s[k;X],FT of ψ[k;X]:ψ[k;X],Ψ[l;X],   [MF881] The inventor can enumerate processing, described in the subsection <4. signature waveforms and templates in TD and FD> as concrete examples of processing in the generator part of a transmitting signal.

The generator part of a signal to be transmitted with the number 102 may be an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a transmitter as described in subsection <7.1 transmitters for generating signature and radar signal>. Or the generator part of a signal to be transmitted with the number 102 may be an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a transmitter apparatus as described in subsections <8.1 multiple target detection using CDMT> and <8.2 multiple target detection using artificial delay-Doppler>.

(Transmitter Part 103)

The transmitter part 103 transmits a transmitter signal generated by the generator part of a signal to be transmitted with the number 102.

(Receiver Apparatus 200)

The receiver apparatus 200 is an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a receiver as described in the above description.

As shown in FIG. 18, the receiver apparatus 200 comprises the receiver part 201, the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202, and the received-data decision part 203 as an example.

(Receiver Part 201)

The receiver part 201 receives a transmitter signal, transmitted by the transmitter apparatus 100. Examples of a received signal that the receiver part 201 receives are e.g., as mentioned above received TD-,FD-signals:r[k:X],R[l;X],   [MF882]

(Shift Estimation and Received-Data Extraction Parts 202)

The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202, (simply called the estimation part) shifts a received signal by the receiver part 201 by estimated shifts and extract the received data.

The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 comprises at least one of AFBs shown in FIGS. 8 to 10, as an example. The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 executes several programs e.g., as described in subsections <5. M-ary detection and estimation of TD and FD signals> and <6. TD and FD cross-correlations for parameter estimations>.

The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 is an apparatus that executes a program as described in subsection <7.2 AFB; receivers and encoder design>. Moreover, the generator part of a signal to be transmitted 102 is an apparatus that executes a program as described in subsection <8.2 High M-PSK communication based on exploiting non-commutative time-frequency shifts>.

Thus, the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 is a method for receiving a signal and executes a program according to the estimation step for estimating a time shift and a frequency shift from a received signal (cf. FIG. 13 and (38), (43) (or (89), (90)), corresponding to switches 2-1, 2-2 on the upward (or downward) side by referring to a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2 (cf. FIG. 17).

The generator part of a signal to be transmitted 102 executes a program according to the shift steps for time-frequency shifting the signal to be transmitted (cf. FIG. 12 and (25), (27) (or (87), (88))), corresponding to switches 1-1, 1-2 are on the upward (or downward) side by referring the non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2 (cf. FIG. 17).

The non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2 is a 3-dimensionalized space version of the 2-D time-frequency plane with the time- and frequency-coordinates by augmenting non-commutative time-frequency shifts as a third coordinate (cf. FIG. 17).

As above mentioned, a pair of unknown delay and Doppler (k _(d) ,l _(D))   [MF883] is itself the pair of non-commutative shifts on the parameter space of co-dimension 2 like the pair of AC shifts. The parameter space is related to the shift operations acting on a signal on the time-frequency plane (TFP); Such a “shift plane” should be discriminated against the TFP (FIG. 16). Namely, to draw a distinction between four fundamental arithmetic operations as well as differential and integral calculus in terms of variables time t, frequency f and non-commutative shift operations for calculating phase terms, one should notice that the NCP of the shift operation is peculiarity of the proposed time-frequency analysis (e.g., the third coordinate of FIG. 17).

Several comments to the patent [6]-patent [8] are listed as follows.

a) The phase distortion (PD) e ^(i2πt) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF884] (or its discretized version W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c) )   [MF885] that the modulation and demodulation by the carrier f_(c) accompanied by the delay t_(d) (or k_(d)) are causing was neglected in the above patents. While in this disclosure, this PD and the PD e^(iκ) of the attenuation factor Ae^(iκ) are jointly and co-operatively canceled out. The reason that the co-operative treatment of PDs is needed is as follows; Firstly, each PD is not independent of each other, Secondly, the PD is propagated due to its group-theoretic property; Thus it is not an easy task to cancel out these PDs precisely. Consequently, the process in updating estimates of time and frequency shifts should be undertaken in co-operation with the phase cancellations (i.e., simultaneous and parallel processing is necessary: e.g., (59)).

b) Time and frequency shifts in this disclosure are referred to as variables of the parameter space of co-dimension 2, associated with two variables:time and frequency on the signal's TFP, respectively. The non-commutative shift operations induce the PDs. While, time and frequency offsets in communication are deviations from the pulse's period and the carrier, respectively.

(1) the estimated time and frequency offsets in patents [7, 8] and time and frequency offsets in OFDM-based communication system in patents [7] are deviations from the period of a chip pulse and the carrier, respectively and correspond to the time shift t_(d) and the frequency shift f_(D) in this disclosure, respectively. Namely, the above both of two patents can be regarded as conventional acquisition and tracking methods for synchronisation because these are unaware of the non-commutativity of t_(d), f_(D).

(2) To avoid confusion between the intended shifts and offsets, the inventor uses the term: not the offsets but “half-shifts of the exponent of the exponential function” (in the sense that the conventional shifts are halved). One of main features in this disclosure is to design a transmitting signal so that its phase function always contains half shifts beforehand and to cancel out the PDs based on the group-theoretic property of the NCP of TFSs.

c) The patent [8] discussed the preamble of the received signal as a template signal only in TD but was unaware of signals in FD and gave a conventional channel estimation method, being unaware of the NCP.

(1) In order to give a convergence proof of the phase updating loop (PUL) algorithm, proposed in the reference patent [6], the inventor 1) defines subspaces of the Hilbert space ε_(i), 1≤i≤4 to which the template belongs; 2) shows that each of N′ TD-CCFs, CCFs of type 3 (or CCFs of type 1) yields a projection operator P₃ (or P₁) projecting onto NMAt-(or LΔt-)time limited (TL) Hilbert supspace ε₃ (or ε₁) and that each of N FD-CCFs, CCFs of type 4 (or CCFs of type 2) gives a projection operator P₄ (or P₂) projecting onto N′M′Δf-(or LΔf-)band limited (BL) Hilbert supspace ε₄ (or ε₂); 3) proves that the PUL algorithm using the localization operator (LO), i.e., the von Neumann's alternative projection Theorem (APT) operator P₃F^(−1,d)P₄F^(d) (or P₄F_(d)P₃F^(−1,d)) for 2-D template matching on the TFP converges on the intersection of the TL Hilbert subspace and the BL Hilbert subspace (F^(−1,d),F^(d) denote IDFT and DFT); furthermore, 4) shows that the interaction is empty by the Youla's theorem and that the PUL can give estimates of t_(d), f_(D) with precision within time duration LΔt and bandwidth LΔf of a Gaussian chip waveform and with computational complexity of but O[N+N′] of not O[N×N′], where N,N′ denote the numbers of TD- and FD-CCFs (L=(ΔtΔf)⁻¹=MM′).

(2) The MMSE algorithm for estimating the channel characteristics, proposed by the patent [8] is based on Bayes's rule and 2-parameter estimation method. Thus this algorithm has computational complexity of O[N×N′]. While this disclosure uses a large number of likelihood functional (LF)s that comprises N′ TD-LFs for estimating Doppler and N FD-LFs for estimating delay. Each LF is based on Bayes's rule. One TD-LF among TD-LFs and FD-LF among FD-LFs in TL-TD and BL-FD Hilbert subspaces, respectively are chosen alternatively and in the sense of maximum likelihood estimate (MLE). Thus the alternative algorithm with computational complexity of O[N+N′] is radically different from conventional methods.

The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 executes a program e.g., a program according to the estimation step for estimating a time shift and a frequency shift from a received signal, as described in (84) and its related description. The estimation step uses the TFSO of type-1 with estimated time shift and frequency shift T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d,i) _(,l) _(μ,i) ^(d)   [MF886] and the TFSO of type-2 with time shift and estimated frequency shift T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D,i) _(,−k) _(σ,i) ^(f,d)   [MF887] and estimates a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in the received signal.

The estimation step mentioned above uses 4 different types of TFSOs: a TFSO of type-1 with estimated time shift, frequency shift, and a phase term representing a half shift of the estimated time shift T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(μ′) ^(d)   [MF888] a TFSO of type-2 with time shift, estimated frequency shift, and a phase term representing a half shift of the estimated frequency shift T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(f,d)   [MF889] a TFSO of type-3 with an observable time shift to be estimated, an observable frequency shift to be estimated, and a phase term representing a half shift of the time shift to be estimated T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,l) _(D) ^(d)   [MF890] (or a frequency dual of the TFSO of type 3 T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−k) _(σ) ^(l,d)),   [MF891] and a TFSO of type-4 representing the estimated time shift, the estimated frequency shift, and the phase term due to the half shift of the estimated time shift T _({circumflex over (k)}) _(d) _(,{circumflex over (l)}) _(D) ^(d)   [MF892] (or a frequency dual of the TFSO of type 4 T _({circumflex over (l)}) _(D) _(,−{circumflex over (k)}) _(d) ^(f,d)   [MF893] and estimates a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in the received signal.

The phase function of a TD-signal to be transmitted contains the phase term representing half shifts of one or more time shift-parameters; The phase function of an FD-signal to be transmitted contains the phase term representing half shifts of one or more frequency shift-parameters.

The receiver apparatus 200 mentioned above can realize a receiving apparatus with high efficiency. For example, when the receiver 200 is used for a radar receiver, it becomes a high rate receiving apparatus.

As described in (84) and its related description, in the estimation step above in the program that the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 executes, the receiver uses the CCF of type-1 (C.f., MF309, (38)) that is represented by using the TFSO of type-1 mentioned above c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾(l _(μ,i) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d,i))   [MF894] and the CCF of type-2 (C.f., MF336, (43)) that is represented by using the TFSO of type-2 mentioned above C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾(k _(σ,i) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D,i)),   [MF895] refers to these CCFs, and estimates a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in the received signal as an example.

As mentioned above, the above CCF of type-1 can be represented by (c.f., MF309, (38))

     [MF 896] ${{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(3)}\left( {\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}} \right)} = {{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}{\, W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}} \times {\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}\;{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi\left\lbrack {k;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}\left( {W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\;\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d}\;\mathcal{T}_{{p\; N\; M},{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{0,{\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}Y_{p^{\prime}}^{\prime}{u_{p^{\prime}}^{(3)}\left\lbrack {k\text{:}\mspace{11mu} Y} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}}}}},$ and the above CCF of type-2 can be represented by (c.f., MF336, (43))

     [MF 897] ${{C\;}_{\rho,\overset{\rightarrow}{p}}^{(4)}\left( {k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}} \right)} = {{Ae}^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}} \times {\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D,} - k_{d}}^{f,d}{\Psi\left\lbrack {\ell;\mathcal{X}} \right\rbrack}{\left( {W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\;\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D},{- k_{\sigma}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {pNM}}}^{f,d}\mathcal{T}_{0,{{- \rho}\; M}}^{f,d}Y_{\rho}{U_{\rho}^{(4)}\left\lbrack {\ell\text{:}\mspace{11mu} Y^{\prime}} \right\rbrack}} \right)^{*}.}}}}$

In the estimation step above in the program, the receiver apparatus 1) uses the CCF of type-1 with AC shifts that is represented by using the TFSO of type-1, of type-3, and of type-4, mentioned above, (cf. MF715, (89)).

     [MF 898] ${{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{AC},{(3)}}\left( {{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{k \in {\mathbb{Z}}}\;{\mathcal{T}_{k_{d},\ell_{D}}^{d}{\psi^{AC}\left\lbrack {{k;\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{(\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}})}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} \times {\quad\quad}}}}}\mspace{130mu}$ $\left( {{W^{{\hat{k}}_{d}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{k}}_{d},\ell_{\mu}}^{d} W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- \hat{j^{\prime}}}\mathcal{T}_{k_{d}^{(j)},\ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})}}^{d}\mathcal{T}_{{p\; N\; M},{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}\frac{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{{(\hat{j})}\prime}}{\sqrt{N_{1}}}\left. \quad{\sum\limits_{n\; \in I_{T}^{(\hat{j})}}{\mathcal{T}_{{n\; M},{\rho^{\prime}M^{\prime}}}^{d}X_{n}^{(\hat{j})}\;{g\lbrack k\rbrack}}} \right)^{*}},} \right.$ and the above CCF of type-2 with AC shifts that is represented by using the TFSO of type-2, of type-3, and of type-4, mentioned above, (cf. MF715, (90)).

     [MF ] ${{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{AC},{(4)}}\left( {{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)} = {A\; e^{i\;\kappa}W^{k_{d}\ell_{c}}{\sum\limits_{\ell \in {\mathbb{Z}}}{\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D,} - k_{d}}^{f,d}{\Psi^{AC}\left\lbrack {{\ell;\left\{ \mathcal{X}^{(i)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{(\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}})}},j,j^{\prime}} \right\rbrack} \times \left( {W^{k_{\sigma}\ell_{c}}\mathcal{T}_{{\hat{\ell}}_{D,} - k_{\sigma}}^{f,d}\; W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- \hat{j^{\prime}}}\mathcal{T}_{\ell_{D}^{(\hat{j})},{- k_{d}^{(j)}}}^{f,d}\;\mathcal{T}_{{p^{\prime}N^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {pNM}}}^{f,d}\frac{X_{\rho}^{(\hat{j})}}{\sqrt{N_{1}^{\prime}}}{\sum\limits_{n^{\prime}\; \in I_{F}^{(\hat{j})}}\;{\mathcal{T}_{{n^{\prime}M^{\prime}},{- {\rho M}}}^{f,d}\; X_{n^{\prime}}^{{(\hat{j})}\prime}\;{G\lbrack\ell\rbrack}}}} \right)^{*}}}}},$ 2) refers to these CCFs, and 3) estimates a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in the received signal as an example.

As described above, the TD-CCF of type-1 with AC shifts (see MF715, (89)) and the FD-CCF of type-2 with AC shifts (see MF715, (90)) contain the PD due to the NCP of modulation and demodulation by the carrier f_(c)(or l_(c)), accompanied by the delay t_(d) (or k_(d)) e ^(i2πl) ^(d) ^(f) ^(c)    [MF900] or its discretized version W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF901] and the PD due to the phase term e^(iκ) of the attenuation factor Ae^(iκ).

As described in MF400, (cf. (60), (61)) and in its related description, the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 updates a pair of the estimated delay and estimated Doppler ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,8) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,8+1))   [MF902] or ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,8+1) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,8))   [MF903] by using the recursion formula for the CP (the AC shift version of (60), MF400, but the AC shift version of the formula for the OP (61) is omitted)

$\begin{matrix} {\mspace{79mu}\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 904} \right\rbrack} & \; \\ {\left. \begin{matrix} {\left( {\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu}^{*},\hat{j^{*}},{\hat{j}}^{\prime,*}} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho^{\prime},\ell_{\mu},\hat{j},{\hat{j}}^{\prime}}\Re\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{c_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{AC},{(3)}}\left( {{\ell_{\mu};{\hat{k}}_{d}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)}}{X_{\rho^{\prime}}^{\prime}{\hat{A}\left( \theta_{s}^{\prime,d} \right)}e^{i\;{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}} \\ {\left( {\rho^{*},k_{\sigma}^{*},j,j} \right) = {{argmax}_{\rho,k_{\sigma},\hat{j},{\hat{j}}^{\prime}}\Re\frac{\sqrt{{PP}^{\prime}}{C_{\rho^{\prime},\overset{\rightarrow}{p},\hat{j},\hat{j^{\prime}}}^{{AC},{(4)}}\left( {{k_{\sigma};{\hat{\ell}}_{D}},j,j^{\prime}} \right)}}{X_{\rho}{\hat{A}\left( \theta_{s}^{\prime,d} \right)}e^{i\;{\hat{\kappa}{(\theta_{s}^{\prime,d})}}}}}} \end{matrix} \right\}{for}\mspace{14mu}{the}\mspace{14mu}{CP}} & \left( 109 \right. \end{matrix}$ and sets the pair of the MLEs (l* _(μ) ,k* _(σ))   [MF905] to the the pair of two estimates ({circumflex over (k)} _(d,8+1) ,{circumflex over (l)} _(D,8+1)).   [MF906]

Furthermore, executions in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 are

1) to refer to the TD-CCF of type-1 with AC shifts (cf. MF715, MF898, (89)) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(3))(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;j,j′)   [MF907] whose real part is maximized by varying; 2) to determine the MLE l* _(μ)   [MF908] and 3) to set it to {right arrow over (l)} _(D,8+1.)   [MF909]

Other executions in the parts 202 are 1) to refer to the FD-CCF of type-2 with AC shifts (cf. MF715, MF899, (90)) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(4))(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D) ;j,j′)   [MF910] whose real part is maximized by varying k_(σ); 2) to determine the MLE k* _(σ)   [MF911] and 3) to set it to {circumflex over (k)} _(d,8+1)   [MF912] Thus the execution in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 is to alternatively update estimates of a time shift and a frequency shift.

The above estimation step in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 estimates the time shift and the frequency shift that are embedded in the signal, with use of MLEs of frequency shift for detecting N′ TD-templates and MLEs of time shift for detecting N FD-templates.

Furthermore, in the above estimation step in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202, when referring to the TD-CCF of type-1 with AC shifts (cf. MF715, MF898, (89)) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(3))(l _(μ) ;{circumflex over (k)} _(d) ;j,j′)   [MF913] and the FD-CCF of type-2 with AC shifts (cf. MF715, MF899, (90)) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) ^(AC,(4))(k _(σ) ;{circumflex over (l)} _(D) ;j,j′)   [MF914] the receiver apparatus firstly replaces the rhs of the first equation of (60) c _(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽³⁾   [MF915] and the rhs of the second equation of (60) C _(ρ,{right arrow over (p)}) ⁽⁴⁾   [MF916] by the associated CCFs with AC shifts and secondly applies the argmax operation to those CCFs with AC shifts, and thirdly augments variables of the argmax operation by a pair of two estimated integers (cf. MF904, (109)) (ĵ,ĵ′).   [MF917]

The receiving apparatus in the above estimation step in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 is a receiver part of receiving a signal TD-CEψ^(AC)[k]/FD-CEΨ^(AC)[l]   [MF918] that is the output signal of the j-th AC with delay and Doppler shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF919] having an integer j, one of two encoded integers by an encoder of k for

   [MF920] -ary communication.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, as discussed above, the receiving apparatus that is an apparatus of receiving a signal comprises an estimation part for estimating a time shift and a frequency shift that are embedded in the signal, with reference to a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

Furthermore, in the MLE, the transmitting TD- and FD-CE signals (87) (or (27)) (according to the state that the switches 1-1, 1-2 in the transmitter of FIG. 12 are on the downward or upward side, respectively, the degree of multiplexing is varied) are given by multiplexing their associated TD- and FD-signatures (88) (or (25)). While the signatures themselves are obtained by 2-D BPSK modulating a Gaussian function and its FD function by 2-D PCs. As shown in (87), the transmitting TD- and FD-CE signals for

   [MF921] -ary communication are obtained as follows; The TD- and FD-signatures first are multiplexed using 2-D BPSK modulation by the j-th PC chosen among the set of independent 2-D PCs

$\left\lbrack {{MF}\; 922} \right\rbrack\left\{ {\mathcal{X}^{(i)} = \left( {\left\{ X_{m}^{(i)} \right\},\left\{ {X^{\prime}}_{m^{\prime}}^{(i)} \right\}} \right)} \right\}_{i = 0}^{\lbrack\frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}}\rbrack}$ according to the encoded integer pair of k

[MF 923] ${j = \left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack},{j^{\prime} = \left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}},$ and secondly, are passed to the AC channel with its associated time and frequency shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j)))   [MF924] or equivalently the transmitter makes the associated TFSOs T _(k) _(d) _((j)) _(,l) _(D) _((j)) ^(d)(or (T _(k) _(D) _((j)) _(,−k) _(d) _((j)) ^(f,d))   [MF925] act on the multiplexed TD- or FD-signature.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, as discussed above, the transmitting method that is a method for transmitting a signal to be transmitted comprises a shift step for time-frequency shifting the signal to be transmitted, with reference to a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 2.

Furthermore, in the above MLE step, when using the CCFs in (89), (90) that are cross-correlations between the received signal TD-CEψ^(AC)[l]/FD-CEΨ^(AC)[l],   [MF926] being passed through the AC channel with its associated time and frequency shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))),   [MF927] characterized by the encoder of k for

   [MF928] -ary communication and an estimated received template (the first and second terms of the rhss of (89), (90) indicate a transmitting signal and an estimated received template, respectively), one should notice the fact that the symbol Σ in (87)-(90) implies the multiplexing, being equivalent to the non-overlapped superposition of a signal, and that such multiplexing can be simulated by using several kinds of TFSOs. In the generation process of a transmitting signal in FIG. 12, several kinds of multiplexing are performed. In (87), (88), TD- and FD-signatures are obtained by multiplexing 2-D BPSK modulated TD- and FD-chip waveforms by 2-D PCs X ^((i))=({X _(m) ^((i)) },{X′ _(m) ^((i))})   [MF929] respectively of periods

[MF 930] ${N_{1} = {N\text{/}\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}}},{{N^{\prime}}_{1} = {N^{\prime}\text{/}{\sqrt{\left\lbrack \frac{\mathcal{M} - 1}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack + 1}.}}}$ The transmitting TD- and FD-CE are obtained by time-frequency shifting the resultant TD- and FD-signatures by data level-shifts and multiplexing those signatures. If the superposition of signals is simply done without the use of time and frequency shifts, then the detection of templates is difficult; One should pay the price for the PDs due to shift operations: It is, however, obvious that fortunately, the PDs are valuable clues in detecting templates and thus the TFSOs are essential tools for precise evaluations of PDs and canceling out the PDs. Furthermore, the rhss of (89), (90) contain the PD due to modulation and demodulation by the carrier l_(c), accompanied by the delay k_(d) W ^(k) ^(d) ^(l) ^(c)    [MF931] and the compensation

₀-ary W

₀ ^(−ĵ)   [MF932] for canceling out the PD due to the phase modulation by the encoded integer j′ of k

[MF 933] ${\mathcal{M}_{0} - {{ary}\mspace{11mu} W_{\mathcal{M}_{0}}^{- j^{\prime}}}},{j^{\prime} = {\left\{ \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\}.}}$

As shown above, the shift step generates the signal to be transmitted by PSK-modulating a chip pulse wave in the TD by the TD-PC of period N and PSK-modulating the TD-PSK modulated TD-pulse wave by the FD-PC of period N′ to generate a multicarrier version of the TD-PSK modulated TD-pulse wave that is a transmitting signal.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, in the transmitting apparatus in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the transmitter, when the switches 1-1, 1-2 are on downward in FIG. 12, first PSK modulates a TD-chip waveform by a TD-PC of period N and secondly PSK modulates the PSK modulated signal by an FD-PC of period N′, thirdly multiplexes the doubly-modulated multi-carrier signal by data symbols, and fourthly passes the data-multiplexed signal through the AC with shifts (k _(d) ^((j)) ,l _(D) ^((j))),   [MF934] having the encoded integer j of k

[MF 935] $j = {\left\lbrack \frac{k}{\mathcal{M}_{0}} \right\rbrack.}$ The output signal of the AC gives TD-CEψ^(AC)[k]/FD-CEΨ^(AC)[l],   [MF936]

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, in the receiver apparatus in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the receiver, when the switches 2-1, 2-2 switch on downward in FIG. 13, the receiver performs maximization of the real parts of the CCFs (cf. MF715, (89), (90)) in terms of 4 variables of the argmax operation (ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′) (or(ρ′,{right arrow over (p)},ĵ,ĵ′)).   [MF937] If the PUL algorithm for updating MLEs (k* _(σ) ;l* _(μ))   [MF938] converges, then the data symbol d _({umlaut over (q)})   [MF939] can be recovered and the decoding of k can be done.

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the generalization of several apparatuses with applications to images in subsection 8.3 is a natural 2-D extension of 1-D signal, exploiting the half shifts due to the NCP of the space-spatial frequency shift (SSFS)s (see (102)-(108)).

(An Extended Version of an Embodiment for Images)

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this disclosure gives a method for receiving an image that comprises an estimation step for estimating a space shift and a spatial frequency shift that are embedded in the received image signal, with reference to a parameter space of co-dimension 2, wherein each of the space shift and the spatial frequency shift has dimension ≥2.

(An Extended Version of an Embodiment for Images)

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the receiver in the above estimation step refers to the 2×2-D symmetrical SSFS operator (SSFSO)s T _(a) _(i) _(,b) _(i) ^((2),d)   [MF940] and its frequency dual T _(b) _(i) _(,−a) _(i) ^((2),f,d)   [MF941] and estimates space shifts and spatial frequency shifts.

(An Extended Version of an Embodiment for Images)

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, this disclosure gives a method for transmitting an image signal, comprising a shift step for space-spatial frequency shifting the image signal to be transmitted, with reference to a parameter space, wherein each of the space shift and the spatial frequency shift has dimension ≥2.

(An Extended Version of an Embodiment for Images)

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the transmitter in the above estimation step refers to the 2×2-D symmetrical SSFS operator (SSFSO)s T _(a) _(i) _(,b) _(i) ^((2),d)   [MF942] and its frequency dual T _(b) _(i) _(,−a) _(i) ^((2),f,d)   [MF943] and space- and spatial frequency-shifts an image.

(The Received-Data Output Part 203)

The received-data output part 203 outputs the extracted data by the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202

<The Signal Flow-Chart Between a Transmitter and a Receiver>

FIG. 19 shows a flow-chart of transmitter-receiver using the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1.

(S101)

In the step S101, the data acquisition part 101 gets data to be transmitted. Concrete procedures by the part 101 have been described above.

(S102)

In the step S102, the signal generation part 102 generates a signal to be transmitted. Concrete procedures by the part 102 have been described above.

(S103)

In the step S103, the transmitter part 103 transmits the signal to be transmitted. Concrete procedures by the part 103 have been described above.

(S201)

In the step, the receive part 201 receives a transmitted signal by the transmitter part S103. Concrete procedures by the part 201 have been described above.

(S202)

In the step S202, the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 estimates shifts and extracts received data, simultaneously. Concrete procedures in the shift estimation and received-data output part 202 are as described above.

(S203)

In the step S203, the received-data output parts 203 outputs the received data extracted by the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202. Concrete procedures in the received-data output part 203 are as described above.

Example 2 of Embodiments of Communication Systems

The example 1 of embodiments of communication systems that is based on the theoretical basis as explained above is explained, together with cited figures.

FIG. 20 shows a block-diagram representing the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 a attached to its surrounding dotted line, according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 20, the system with the number 1 a comprises a transmitter apparatus 100 a and a receiver apparatus 200 a. The transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 a, like the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 in FIG. 18 as discussed above, can be used for both a radar and a communication system (e.g., transmitter-receiver system to convey voice data and or image data). Other parts are labelled with the same number as their associated parts in the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 and hence no explanation for them is necessary.

<Transmitter Apparatus 100 a>

The transmitter apparatus 100 a is an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a transmitter as described in the above description.

As shown in FIG. 20, the transmitter apparatus 100 a comprises the acquisition part of transmitting data 101, the generator part of a transmitting signal 102 a, and the transmitter part 103 as an example.

(The Transmitting Signal Generation Part 102 a)

the transmitting signal generation part 102 a comprises the generator part of a transmitting signal 102 relating to the example 1 of embodiments of transmitter-receiver system and the embedding shift part 110 as well.

As discussed in (84) just below, the embedding shift part 110 generates a transmitting signal into which a set of N_(path) delay and Doppler parameters {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF944] are embedded.

The generator part of a transmitting signal 102 a time-frequency shifts a signal to be transmitted by using one time shift (or multiple time shifts) and one frequency shift (or multiple frequency shifts) {(k _(d,i) ,l _(D,i))}_(i=1) ^(N) ^(path)    [MF945]

<Receiver Apparatus 200 a>

The receiver apparatus 200 a is an apparatus that executes a program imposed on a receiver as described in the above description.

As shown in FIG. 20, the receiver apparatus 200 a comprises a receiver part 201, a shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 a, and a received-data decision part 203 as an example

(The Shift Estimation and Received-Data Extraction Parts 202 a)

The shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 a comprises the parts similar as parts that the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 comprises, relating to the example 1 of embodiments of transmitter-receiver system as an example.

<The Signal Flow-Hart Between a Transmitter and a Receiver>

FIG. 21 shows a flow-chart of transmitter-receiver using the transmitter-receiver system with the number 1 a. The steps S101, S103,S201, and S203 are same processing as the description using FIG. 19 and hence no explanation for them is necessary.

(S102 a)

In the step S102 a, the generator part of a transmitting signal 102 a with the embedding-shift part 110 generates a transmitting signal. Concrete procedures by the generator part of a transmitting signal S102 a have been described above.

(S202 a)

In the S202 a, the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 a estimates shifts and extracts the received data, simultaneously. Concrete procedures in the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202 a are as described above.

Example 3 of Embodiments of Communication Systems

The transmitter-receiver system that is explained by referring to FIGS. 18-21 may be an embodiment that executes programs as described in subsection <8.3 signal processing exploiting multi-dimensional non-commutative apatial-spatial frequency shifts>:

As described in subsection <8.3 signal processing exploiting multi-dimensional non-commutative spatial-spatial frequency shifts >, the received apparatus 200 executes the estimation step for estimating SSFSs that are embedded in the received images by referring to the parameter space, i.e., SSFS parameter space of co-dimension ≥2 as an example.

As described in subsection <8.3 signal processing exploiting multi-dimensional non-commutative spatial-spatial frequency shifts>, the above estimation step, the receiver refers to the 2×2-D symmetrical spatial shift and spatial frequency shift (SSFS) operator (SSFSO)s representing the half-shift-PDs due to the NCP of the SSFSs T _(a) _(i) _(,b) _(i) ^((2),d)   [MF946] and its frequency dual T _(b) _(i) _(,−a) _(i) ^((2),f,d)   [MF947] and estimates SSFSs.

Similarly, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the transmitter, i.e., the method for transmitting an image refers to the SSFS parameter space of co-dimension ≥2 and comprises 2 different SSFSOs that represent spatial-spatial frequency shifting an image to be transmitted and the PD due to the half-shift of the spatial frequency shift (or the PD due to the half-shift of the spatial shift).

In the above shift step, the transmitter refers to the symmetrical SSFSOs T _(a) _(i) _(,b) _(i) ^((2),d)   [MF948] and its frequency dual T _(b) _(i) _(,−a) _(i) ^((2),f,d)   [MF949] and estimates SSFSs.

Example of Embodiments Using Software

The control-block in the transmitter apparatuses 100, 100 a and the receiver apparatuses 200, 200 a(in particular, the generator parts of a transmitting signal 102, 102 a and the shift estimation and received-data extraction parts 202, 202 a) may be realized by logical circuits implemented by integrated circuit (IC chip)s or by software.

In the case of the implementation by software, the transmitter apparatuses 100, 100 a and the receiver apparatuses 200, 200 a are equipped with a computer that executes programs for each of several functions; e.g., this computer comprises multiple processors and computer-readable memories. The computer executes the programs that the processors read from the memories so that it can perform the aim of the present invention, non-transitory memory, e.g, read-only-memory (ROM), tape, disc, card, IC memory, and programmable logical circuits, etc are used for the memories. The computer may be equipped with random access memory (RAM) performing the above programs. The above programs may be installed via any transmission media (such as communication network, broadcast, radio wave) and supplied by the above computer. In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the above program that may be embodied in an embedded data signal into a carrier wave by electronic transmission and may be realized.

Program products by computer that realize several functions of the transmitter apparatuses 100, 100 a and the receiver apparatuses 200, 200 a include one of embodiments of the present invention. The above program product by computer loads programs that are provided by any transmission media by using at least one computer and makes the computer to execute at least one program. Thus, at least one processor associated with the computer executes at least one program. Thus each of functions of the transmitter apparatuses 100, 100 a and the receiver apparatuses 200, 200 can be realized. The program product by computer makes at least one of program-installed computers to execute steps in transmitting process (method of transmission) and receiving process (method of receiving).

In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the above mentioned embodiments have no limitation. The embodiments are modified within the claims. Comprising several methods or techniques given in different embodiments leads to an embodiment of the present patent and includes one of methods of the present patent. Furthermore, adequate comprising several methods or techniques given in different embodiments may provide a new technical characteristic feature.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION

The present patent is ideally suited to wireless transmitter-receiver communication systems and to radar systems.

LIST OF SYMBOLS FOR PARTS OF EMBODIMENT

-   1, 1 a: transmitter-receiver system -   100, 100 a: transmitter apparatus -   101: acquisition part of transmitting data -   102, 102 a: transmitting signal generation part -   103: transmitter part -   110: embedding-shift part -   200, 200 a: receiver apparatus -   201: receiver part -   202, 202 a: shift estimation and received-data extraction parts     (estimation part) -   203: received-data decision part 

The invention claimed is:
 1. A method for receiving a signal with a high

-phase-shift keying (PSK) modulated symbol (signal) $\left\{ {d_{p,p^{\prime}} = {{\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2{\pi k}}{\mathcal{M}} \right)} \in {\mathbb{C}}}} \right\}_{p,{p^{\prime} = 1}}^{P,P^{\prime}},\left( {0 \leq k \leq {\mathcal{M} - 1}} \right)$ on a lattice T _(s) Z×F _(s) Z of a time-frequency plane (TFP), with address {right arrow over (p)}=(p,p′),0≤p≤P−1,0≤p′≤P′−1 at a receiver apparatus, that convey a set of coefficients {a _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) in a space domain (SD) and {a′ _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) in a spatial frequency domain (SFD) with a conjoint 2D spatial/spatial frequency (S/SF) representation ${{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}},{{\hat{H}\lbrack u\rbrack} = {{F^{(2)}\left\lbrack {H\lbrack x\rbrack} \right\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}^{\prime}{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}}}$ in terms of a set of templates and their Fourier transform (FT)s {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)],ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}_(i=1) ^(n), with parameters {right arrow over (θ)}^(i)=(x _(0i) ,u _(0i) ,{right arrow over (a)} _(i)),x _(0i)=(x _(0i) ,y _(0i)),u _(0i)=(u _(0i) ,v _(0i)),{right arrow over (a)} _(i)=(a _(i),β_(i)), in place of an original SD-image I(x) with 2D space (S) variable vector x=(x,y) and its FT SFD-image Î[u]=F ⁽²⁾[I[x]] with 2D spatial frequency (SF) variable vector u(u,v) , of a plurality of bits, comprising performing a decoding step at the receiver apparatus for decoding a symbol sequence d _(ji) into two sets of received SD- and SFD-expansion coefficients, respectively denoted by {ã _(i)}_(t=1) ^(n) ,{ã′ _(i)}^(i=1) _(n) and a reconstructing step at the receiver apparatus, using a 2D elementary function (template) g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)] and its FTĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)] , for reconstructing an associated image and its FT, denoted as {tilde over (H)}(x) and {circumflex over ({tilde over (H)})}(u) , corresponding to ${{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}},{{\hat{H}\lbrack u\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}^{\prime}{{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}.}}}}$ and given as respectively ${{\overset{\sim}{H}\lbrack u\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{{\overset{\sim}{a}}^{\prime}{g\left\lbrack {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}}}},{{\overset{\overset{\sim}{\hat{}}}{H}\lbrack u\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{{\overset{\sim}{a}}^{\prime}{{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right\rbrack}.}}}}$
 2. The method recited in claim 1, wherein the 2D elementary function (template) g[x:θ _(i)] and its FTĝ[u;θ _(i)] are chosen as g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]=T _(x) _(0i) _(,u) _(0i) ⁽²⁾ z(x),ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}_(i)]=T _(u) _(0i) _(,−x) _(0i) ^((2),f) {circumflex over (z)}(u),1≤i≤n by spatial-spatial frequency (S-SF) shifting Gaussian envelope z(z), respectively its FT{circumflex over (z)}(u) by S-SF shifts x _(0i)=(x _(0i) ,y _(0i)),u _(0i)=(u _(0i) ,v _(0i))ϵ

²,1≤i≤n as members of 2D Gabor filter family, using a 2D symmetrical spatial-spatial frequency shift operator (SSFSO) and its frequency dual of the 2D symmetrical SSFSO $\left. \begin{matrix} {{{{\mathfrak{T}}_{x_{0},u_{0}}^{(2)}{z(x)}} = {{z\left( {x - x_{0}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\;{{\pi u}_{0} \cdot {({x - \frac{x_{0}}{2}})}}}}},{1 \leq i \leq n},} \\ {{{{\mathfrak{T}}_{u_{0} - x_{0}}^{{(2)},f}{\hat{z}(u)}} = {{\hat{z}\left( {u - u_{0}} \right)}e^{{i\; 2\; x_{0}} - {({u - \frac{u_{0}}{2}})}}}},{1 \leq i \leq n},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ each of which represents the S-SF shifts and a phase term due to a half shift of the S shift, respectively SF shift, e ^(−iπu) ⁰ ^(·x) ⁰ ,(resp.,e ^(iπx) ⁰ ^(·u) ⁰ ),1≤i≤n, wherein a conventional 2-D Gabor function g′(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)) and its FT ĝ ¹(u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))=F ⁽²⁾[g′(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))] with peak-address (x _(0i) ,u _(0i)) in 4-D SD-SFD space can be rewritten as $\left. \begin{matrix} {{\left. {{g^{\prime}\left( {x;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} = {{\mathfrak{T}}_{x_{0i},u_{0i}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{x^{2}\alpha_{i}^{2}} + {y^{2}\beta_{i}^{2}}})}}} \cdot e^{2i\;{{\pi x} \cdot u}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack \cdot e^{i\;{{\pi u}_{0i} \cdot x_{0i}}}},} \\ {{\left. {{{\hat{g}}^{\prime}\left( {u;{\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta}}_{i}} \right)} = {{\mathfrak{T}}_{u_{0i} - x_{0i}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{u^{2}\alpha_{i}^{- 2}} + {v^{2}\beta_{i}^{2}}})}}} \cdot e^{{- 2}i\;{{\pi x} \cdot u}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack \cdot e^{i\;{{\pi x}_{0i} \cdot u_{0i}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ which implies that the 2-D Gabor function and its FT differ from the template and its FT by additional half shifts e ^(−iπu) ^(0i) ^(·x) ^(0i) ,e ^(iπx) ^(0i) ^(·u) ^(0i) , respectively, wherein for discrete S and SF variables ${\overset{\rightarrow}{k} = {\left( {k_{1},k_{2}} \right) = {\in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}}},{k_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{k_{2} = {{\left\lfloor \frac{y}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor.\overset{\rightarrow}{\ell}} = {\left( {\ell_{1},\ell_{2}} \right) = {\in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}}}},{\ell_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{k_{2} = \left\lfloor \frac{\upsilon}{\Delta\;\upsilon} \right\rfloor}$ if discrete SD and SFD signals z[{right arrow over (k)}],Z[{right arrow over (l)}] have discrete S-SF shifts ${a_{i} = \left( {a_{i\; 1},a_{i\; 2}} \right)},{b_{i} = {\left( {b_{i\; 1},b_{i\; 2}} \right) \in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}},{a_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{a_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{y_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{\upsilon_{0\; i}}{\Delta\;\upsilon} \right\rfloor},$ then their associated shifted signals are given by using 4-D von Neumann's SSFSOs with two twiddle factors W₁,W₂ $\left. \quad\begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{a_{i},b_{i}}^{{(2)},d}{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack}} = {{z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{k} - \overset{\rightarrow}{a}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{- {b_{1}{({k_{1} - \frac{a_{1}}{2}})}}}W_{2}^{- {b_{2}{({k_{2} - \frac{a_{2}}{2}})}}}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{b_{i},{- a_{i}}}^{{(2)},f,d}{Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack}} = {{Z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} - \overset{\rightarrow}{b}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{a_{1}{({\ell_{1} - \frac{b_{1}}{2}})}}W_{2}^{a_{2}{({\ell_{2} - \frac{b_{2}}{2}})}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ each of which contains the S-SF symmetrical half shifts ${W_{1}^{\frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot W_{2}^{\frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}},{W_{1}^{\frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot W_{2}^{\frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}},$ respectively.
 3. The method recited in claim 1, wherein the reconstructing step applies von Neumann's alternating projection theorem (APT) to two dimensional projection operators (2D POs) P _(g|x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(|) ,P _(g[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]),1≤i≤n, acting on the SD and SFD, respectively and defines a concatenation of the two 2D POs, together with 2D FT F ^((2),d) and inverse FT F ^(−1,(2),d) called 4D symmetrical localization operator (LO)s, defined by P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d) P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) ,P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d),1≤i≤n respectively acting on the reconstructed SD-image {tilde over (H)}(x) and its FT SFD-image {circumflex over ({tilde over (H)})}(u), symmetrically in terms of the SD-SFD images and performs a repetition of the 4D LO which gives optimized expansion coefficients for reconstruction given as a _(i) ˜P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) I(x),a′ _(i) ˜P _(g[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]Î(u),a) _(i) ˜a′ _(i),1≤i≤n, wherein such two 4D LOs precisely select a limited 4D cube with Cartesian lattice dimensions (L ₁ ,L ₂) and sampling intervals of 2D S variables (x,y) , denoted as (Δx,Δy) and those of 2D SF variables (u,v) , denoted as (Δu;Δv)=(1/(L ₁ Δx),1/(L ₂ Δy)), such that an interaction of a Hilbert space of [L ₁ Δx,L ₂ Δy], S limited signals and that of [L ₁ Δx,L ₂ Δv] SF limited signals [L ₁ Δx,L ₂ Δy]×[L ₁ Δu,L ₂ Δv]⊂

⁴  around a peak address (x _(0i) ,u _(0i))  in the 2D S/SF plane and filter out a rest, in conjunction with an exponentially decaying property of a Gaussian-type elementary function (template) wherein the NCP of two non-commutative S-SF shifts has a beneficial effect on such LO's properties by precisely selecting a peak (x _(0i) ,u _(0i)) and filtering out a rest to yield precise expansion coefficients.
 4. A method for transmitting a signal with a high

-phase-shift-keying (PSK) symbol (signal) ${d_{\overset{\rightarrow}{q}} = {{\exp\left( \frac{i\; 2{\pi k}}{\mathcal{M}} \right)} \in {\mathbb{C}}}},\left( {0 \leq k \leq {\mathcal{M} - 1}} \right)$ on a lattice T _(x)

×T _(s)

of a time-frequency plane (TFP), with address {right arrow over (q)}=(q,q′) at a transmitter apparatus, that conveys a conjoint two dimensional spatial/spatial frequency (2D S/SF) image representation as a set of coefficients {a _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) in a space-domain two dimensional (SD 2D) Gabor representation ${{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}}},$ respectively as a set of coefficients, {a′ _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) in a spatial frequency-domain two dimensional (SFD 2D) Gabor representation $\left. {{H\lbrack u\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}}} \right),$ as compressed data, in place of an original space-domain (SD)-image I(x) (respectively, its Fourier transform (FT), spatial frequency-domain (SFD)-image Î(u)=F ⁽²⁾[I[x]]), of a plurality of bits, comprising performing a representation step at the transmitter apparatus for representing an original image I(x), respectively its (Fourier transform (FT) image Î(u), either exactly or by projecting it onto a chosen set of two dimensional space-domain (2D SD)-templates {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}_(i=1) ^(n), respectively their FT SFD-templates {ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}_(i=1) ^(n), such that a resultant vector ${{H\lbrack x\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}{g\left\lbrack {x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}}},\left( {{{resp}.},{{\hat{H}\lbrack u\rbrack} = {{\mathcal{F}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {H\lbrack x\rbrack} \right\rbrack} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{n}\;{a_{i}^{\prime}{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}}}}} \right)$ minimizes squared norms of errors |I[x]−H[x]∥²,(resp.,∥Î[u]−Ĥ[u]∥²) and an encoding step at the transmitter apparatus for encoding two sets of n expansion coefficients {a _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) and {a′ _(i)}_(i=1) ^(n) into an

-ary PSK symbol sequence d _({right arrow over (q)}) with data address {right arrow over (q)}=(q,q′) to be transmitted, and then transmitting a signal with d _({right arrow over (q)}) at the transmitter apparatus via an optional doubly dispersive channel for mobile communication.
 5. The method recited in claim 4, wherein the representation step for projecting an image I(x), respectively its FT image Î(u) onto a set of 2D templates, respectively their FTs, g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)],(resp.,ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]),1≤i≤n, is defined by two orthogonal projection operator (PO)s, P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]),(resp.,P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(])),1≤i≤n, wherein projection coefficients a _(i) ;a′ _(i) are approximately given as $\left. \quad\begin{matrix} {{{a_{i} \sim {P_{g{\lbrack{x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}}\rbrack}}{I(x)}}} = \frac{\sum\limits_{x}{{g^{*}\left\lbrack {x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack} \cdot {I(x)}}}{\sum\limits_{x}{{g\left\lbrack {x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}^{2}}},{1 \leq i \leq n},} \\ {{{a_{i}^{\prime} \sim {P_{\hat{g}{\lbrack{u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}}\rbrack}}{\hat{I}(u)}}} = \frac{\sum\limits_{u}{{{\hat{g}}^{*}\left\lbrack {u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack} \cdot {I(u)}}}{\sum\limits_{u}{{\hat{g}\left\lbrack {u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right\rbrack}}^{2}}},{1 \leq i \leq n},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ each of which is derived from an exponentially decaying property of a Gaussian elementary function (template) and their FTs g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)],ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)], 1≤i≤n and a phase term due to the half shift that is a direct result of a non-commutative property (NCP) of the S-SF shifts.
 6. The method recited in claim 5, wherein the representation step applies von Neumann's alternating projection theorem (APT) to two two dimensional projection operators (2D POs) P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) ,P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]),1≤i≤n, acting on the SD and SFD, respectively and defines a concatenation of the two 2D POs, together with 2D FT F ^((2),d) and inverse FT F ^(−1,(2),d) called 4D symmetrical localization operator (LO)s, defined by P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d) P _(ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) ,P _(g[u;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^((2),d) P _(ĝ[x;{right arrow over (θ)}) _(i) _(]) F ^(−1,(2),d),1≤i≤n, respectively acting on the SD-image I(x) and its FT SFD-image Î(u), symmetrically in terms of the SD-SFD images and performs a repetition of the 4D LO which gives optimized expansion coefficients given as a _(i) ˜P _(g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} i]) I(x),a′ ₂ ˜P _({tilde over (g)}[u;{right arrow over (θ)}i]) Î(u),a _(i) ˜a′ _(i),1≤i≤n, wherein such two 4D LOs precisely select a limited 4D cube with Cartesian lattice dimensions (L ₁ ,L ₂) and sampling intervals of 2D S variables (x,y) , denoted as (Δx,Δy) and those of 2D SF variables (u,v) , denoted as (Δu,Δv)=(1/(L ₁ Δx),1/(L ₂ Δy)), such that an interaction of a Hilbert space of [L ₁ Δx,L ₂ Δy], S limited signals and that of [L ₁ Δu,L ₂ Δv] SF limited signals [L ₁ Δx,L ₂ Δy]×[L ₁ Δu,L ₂ Δv]⊂

¹ around a peak address (x _(θ) _(i) ,u _(θ) _(i) ) in the 2D S/SF plane and filter out a rest, in conjunction with an exponentially decaying property of a Gaussian-type elementary function (template) g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)],ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)], wherein the NCP of two non-commutative S-SF shifts has a beneficial effect on such LO's properties by precisely selecting a peak (x _(0i) ,u _(0i)) and filtering out a rest to yield precise expansion coefficients.
 7. The method recited in claim 4, wherein the set of 2D templates and their FTs {g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]}_(i=1) ^(n) ,{ĝ _(i)(u)}_(i=1) ^(n) are chosen as g[x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]=T _(x) _(0i) _(;u) _(0i) ⁽²⁾ z(x),ĝ[u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)]=T_(u) _(0i) _(,−x) _(0i) ^((2),l) {circumflex over (z)}(u),1≤i≤n by S-SF shifting Gaussian envelope z(x), respectively its FT {circumflex over (z)}(u), by S-SF shifts x _(0i)=(x _(0i) ,y _(0i)),u _(0i)=(u _(0i) ,v _(0i))ϵ

²,1≤i≤n with reference to a 2D symmetrical spatial-spatial frequency shift operator (SSFSO) and a frequency dual of the 2D symmetrical SSFSO $\left. \quad\begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{x_{0},u_{0}}^{(2)}{z(x)}} = {{z\left( {x - x_{0}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\pi\;{u_{0} \cdot {({x - \frac{x_{0}}{2}})}}}}},{1 \leq i \leq n}} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{u_{0},{- x_{0}}}^{{(2)},f}{\hat{z}(u)}} = {{\hat{z}\left( {u - u_{0}} \right)}e^{i\; 2\pi\;{x_{0} \cdot {({u - \frac{u_{0}}{2}})}}}}},{1 \leq i \leq n},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ each of which represents S-SF shifts and a phase term due to a half shift of the S shift, respectively SF shift, e ^(−iπu) ^(0i) ^(·x) ^(0i) ,(resp.,e ^(iπx) ^(0i) ^(·u) ^(0i) ),1≤i≤n, such that a conventional 2-D Gabor function g′(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i)) and its FT ĝ′(u;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))=F ⁽²⁾[g′(x;{right arrow over (θ)} _(i))] with peak-address (x _(0i) ,u _(0i)) in 4-D SD-SFD space can be rewritten as $\left. \quad\begin{matrix} {{\left. {{g^{\prime}\left( {x;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right)} = {\mathcal{T}_{x_{0\; i},u_{0\; i}}^{(2)}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{x^{2}\alpha_{i}^{2}} + {y^{2}\beta_{i}^{2}}})}}} \cdot e^{2i\;{{\pi x} \cdot u}}} \right)}} \right\rbrack \cdot e^{{- i}\;{{\pi u}_{0i} \cdot x_{0i}}}},} \\ {{{{\hat{g}}^{\prime}\left( {u;\overset{\rightarrow}{\theta_{i}}} \right)} = {{\mathcal{T}_{u_{0\; i},{- x_{0\; i}}}^{{(2)},f}\left\lbrack {e^{- {\pi{({{u^{2}\alpha_{i}^{- 2}} + {\upsilon^{2}\beta_{i}^{- 2}}})}}} \cdot e^{{- 2}i\;{{\pi x} \cdot u}}} \right\rbrack} \cdot e^{i\;{{\pi x}_{0i} \cdot u_{0i}}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\},$ which implies that the 2-D Gabor function and its FT differ from a 2D elementary function (template) and its FT by additional half shifts e ^(−iπu) ^(0i) ^(·x) ^(0i) ,e^(iπx) ^(0i) ^(·u) ^(0i) ), respectively, wherein, for discrete S and SF variables ${\overset{\rightarrow}{k} = {\left( {k_{1},k_{2}} \right) = {\in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}}},{k_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{k_{2} = {{\left\lfloor \frac{y}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor.\overset{\rightarrow}{\ell}} = {\left( {\ell_{1},\ell_{2}} \right) = {\in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}}}},{\ell_{1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{k_{2} = \left\lfloor \frac{\upsilon}{\Delta\;\upsilon} \right\rfloor}$ if a discrete SD and SFD signals z[{right arrow over (k)}],Z[{right arrow over (l)}] have discrete S-SF shifts ${a_{i} = \left( {a_{i\; 1},a_{i\; 2}} \right)},{b_{i} = {\left( {b_{i\; 1},b_{i\; 2}} \right) \in {\mathbb{Z}}^{2}}},{a_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{x_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; x} \right\rfloor},{a_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{y_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; y} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 1} = \left\lfloor \frac{u_{0\; i}}{\Delta\; u} \right\rfloor},{b_{i\; 2} = \left\lfloor \frac{\upsilon_{0\; i}}{\Delta\;\upsilon} \right\rfloor},$ then their associated shifted signals are given by using 4-D von Neumann's SSFSOs with two twiddle factors W₁,W₂ $\left. \quad\begin{matrix} {{{\mathcal{T}_{a_{i},b_{i}}^{{(2)},d}{z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{k} \right\rbrack}} = {{z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{k} - \overset{\rightarrow}{a}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{- {b_{1}{({k_{1} - \frac{a_{1}}{2}})}}}W_{2}^{- {b_{2}{({k_{2} - \frac{a_{2}}{2}})}}}}},} \\ {{{\mathcal{T}_{b_{i},{- a_{i}}}^{{(2)},f,d}{Z\left\lbrack \overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} \right\rbrack}} = {{Z\left\lbrack {\overset{\rightarrow}{\ell} - \overset{\rightarrow}{b}} \right\rbrack}W_{1}^{a_{1}{({\ell_{1} - \frac{b_{1}}{2}})}}W_{2}^{a_{2}{({\ell_{2} - \frac{b_{2}}{2}})}}}},} \end{matrix} \right\}$ each of which contains the S-SF symmetrical half shifts ${W_{1}^{\frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot W_{2}^{\frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}},{W_{1}^{\frac{b_{1}a_{1}}{2}} \cdot W_{2}^{\frac{b_{2}a_{2}}{2}}},$ respectively.
 8. A transmitter-receiver system for an original image and its Fourier transform (FT) image signals via a doubly dispersive channel for mobile communication, comprising: a transmitter apparatus; and a receiver apparatus, the transmitter apparatus including a representation part for representing an image and its FT image as a set of expansion coefficients, regarded as compressed data of an image and its FT image by projecting it onto a set of two dimensional spatial-spatial frequency (2D S-SF) shifted functions, together with use of a spatial-spatial frequency shift operator (SSFSO) representing spatial-spatial frequency (S-SF) shifts and a phase term due to a half shift of a S shift, and a frequency dual of the SSFSO representing S-SF shifts and a phase term due to a half shift of the SF shift, with reference to a non-commutative shift parameter space of co-dimension 4 and an encoding part for encoding a resultant projection coefficient to an

 -ary symbol sequence to be transmitted, in place of an original SD-image I(x), respectively its Fourier transform (FT), spatial frequency-domain (SFD)-image Î(u),  of a plurality of bits, and while an optimization part for optimizing expansion coefficients by applying von Neumann's alternating projection theorem (APT) to a 4D symmetrical localization operator (LO), which is a concatenation of a space domain-projection operator (SD-PO) and a spatial frequency domain-projection operator (SFD-PO), and by a repetition of two such 4D LOs, with use of a symmetrical SSFSO and its frequency dual, and a transmitting part at the transmitter apparatus for transmitting the signal with encoded data sequence, the receiver apparatus including a receiving part for receiving a signal with

 -PSK symbol sequence at a receiver apparatus, a decoding part at the receiver apparatus for decoding the received

 -ary symbol sequence to two sets of SD-SFD projection coefficients of an image and its FT image, and a reconstruction part at the receiver apparatus for reconstructing image and FT image using received expansion coefficients of the image and its FT image, in conjunction with 2D S-SF shifted functions, together with the use of a SSFSO representing S-SF shifts and a phase term due to a half shift of the S shift, and a frequency dual of the SSFSO representing S-SF shifts, and a phase term due to a half shift of the SF shift, with reference to two non-commutative shift parameter spaces of co-dimension
 4. 